Home

History Module Service - Honeywell Process Solutions

1. 12 02 History Module Service 26 2 2 2 210 445 875 MB and 1 8 GB History Module Description Overview Figure 2 5 illustrates a WREN type History Module that has been upgraded to accommodate dual 210 megabyte 445 megabyte 875 megabyte or 1 8 gigabyte Winchester disk drives The drive s ina WREN I WREN II or WREN III History Module can be replaced with the 210 445 or 875 MB drive The following replacement kits are available e 210 MB drive replacement kit part number 51196269 100 e 445 MB drive replacement kit part number 51196351 100 e 875 MB drive replacement kit part number 51196720 100 e 1 8 GB drive replacement kit part number 51196897 100 A kit contains one drive installation hardware and installation instructions The electronics module can be the standard LCN Five Slot Module or Dual Node Module Figure 2 5 illustrates the Five Slot Module Each of the two Winchester Drive Modules occupy the same space as a Five Slot Module or Dual Node Module but they contain a slide out tray assembly on which a 210 MB 445 MB 875 MB or 1 8 GB drive is mounted Each Winchester Drive Module has its own power supply that is mounted at the left side of the tray assembly Figure 2 5 Dual 210 445 875 MB or 1 8 GB Drive History Module Five Slot Module Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 27 2 2 2 210 445 875 MB and 1 8 GB History Module Description Conti
2. cceceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaeeeeeeaeeeeneea SECTION 8 WDA HISTORY MODULE WITH DUAL LOGICAL DRIVE TRAY DISASSEMBEY eiceveccescceccevscaetccedecscsce cnet becctesentecstes anA iaaea Eanos ESk 8 1 OVERVICW ict tite atae ti a na a a aaa ieee sata Let ie ha tae 8 2 History Module Disassembly ccececeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaes 8 2 1 General Disassembly rimena anaran au ea ne anaien aeaa raaa an aieia 8 2 2 Fan Assembly Rem yval ssri everis ipini nennt ENNE ai AERE ETEEN R AREALE REKASA 8 2 3 Power Supply Removal ccccceseeeeeceeceeeeeseaeeeeeaeeseneeceeeesaeseaeseeneeesaes 8 2 4 Circuit Board Removal ccecccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeceneeecaeeeeaeeseeeeeseaeeeseaeeeeeeeee 8 2 5 Winchester Disk Assembly Removal sssssssssssrrssssrrssrsrrssrrnssrrnssrernssns 8 3 Winchester Drive Tray Disassembly eecccceeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeeeeenas 8 3 1 Winchester Disk Drive Removal sssssssssssesssrnessennesrsnnesnnnnesrnnnesrnnnnsrennnnne SECTION 9 WREN TYPE HISTORY MODULE ASSEMBLY cccssecsseeeseeeeeeeees 9 1 OVEIVICW iva n a iat alee ane ha aa a a A a i 9 2 Electronics Module Assembly ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeeneaeees 9 3 Winchester Drive Module Assembly cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeettneeeeeenaeeeeeeae 9 3 1 Fan Replaceme ntistsscacciseczctehstcctad sheeted hha scceki shaakcihhsscdben placket sh seecsephaan ibis 9 3 2 Power Supply R
3. A History Module with redundant dual drives is physically similar to a History Module with a redundant single drive that is discussed in subsection 2 3 1 but each of the Winchester Drive Module has two WREN II 210 MB 445 MB 875 MB or 1 8 GB drives mounted on its slide out tray assembly as illustrated in Figure 2 9 The top Winchester Drive Module module 2 contains Drive 5 Device 5 pinned for address 5 and Drive 3 Device 3 pinned for address 3 The bottom Winchester Drive Module module 1 contains Drive 4 Device 4 pinned for address 4 and Drive 2 Device 2 pinned for address 2 Figure 2 9 illustrates the positions and address assignments of the drives on the tray assemblies while Figures 2 12 and 2 13 illustrates the components and interconnections of the drives In subsections 2 2 1 and 2 2 2 it is stated that only one drive should be mounted in a Winchester Drive Module The redundant dual drive configuration seems to contradict that statement In a redundant dual drive configuration there is a remote possibility that data being written to a drive might be corrupted by a power failure but it would occur in only one drive and not in the redundant partner also When power eventually returns the software will sense the error while synchronizing the redundant data files and will overwrite the corrupted data Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 38 2 3 2 Redundant Dual Drive Config
4. 12 02 History Module Service 275 11 2 4 Circuit Board Replacement continued K4LCN Figure 11 5 illustrates LCN node address selection on the K4LCN board 51401946 100 LCN assembly 51401946 100 The pinning block TS2 is located at coordinate address selection an odd number 21E on the board The absence of a jumper is a binary 1 Parity must be Figure 11 5 K4LCN Board 51401946 100 LCN Node Address Selection LCN Add ress 8G Pinning PARITY 64 32 16 BINARY 8 WEIGHT N A N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N AWW eeeceeeeceecceeeeeeeeeeeceeceeceeeeeceeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeedeeedeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeedeeeeeeeeeeeeeedeeeeedddeeeeddddd NOT ON BOARD This Sample is 43 LCN ADDRESS Jumper Out 1 Jumper In 0 The overall number of jumpers out including the parity jumper must be an odd number Note that addresses 0 127 could be set but software will allow only node addresses 1 64 The 1 and 0 refer to DIP switch positions when a switch assembly is installed in place of the jumper block 51081 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 276 11 2 4 Circuit Board Replacement continued K4LCN Figure 11 6 illustrates LCN node address selection on the K4LCN board 51402755 100 LCN assembly 51402755 100 The pinning block TS1 is locat
5. ATTENTION In some cases it may be desirable to quickly replace the drive to save the time needed for the HVTS tests HVTS testing will take approximately hour if no additional problems are discovered Replacement drives come preformatted and require only a History Module initialization and data restore operation The removed drive can be tested reclaimed using HVTS at a more convenient time or on alternate equipment The circumstances will dictate the urgency in restoring the complete functionality of the History Module The best maintenance strategy to use will depend on the nature of the failure and the criticality of the lost functionality The alternatives that are available listed in probable order of increasing time to perform are as follows 1 Continue running with reduced functionality and repair the drive when more convenient This may not be practical if the functionality that was lost due to the error is critical to the process 2 Attempt a quick fix by using the SMCC Sector Initialization Reassignment function Refer to subsection 5 3 13 There are two variations that can occur The nature of the error is such that initialization and total reload of the drive is not required After using the SMCC Sector Initialization Reassignment function reload the bad file from backup and resume operation The nature of the error is such that the drive must be initialized and reloaded Save as much data as possible use the SMC
6. 9 Load the HMO personality by performing a History Module autoboot 10 Enable the saving of Continuous History Data and any other normal functions required to restore complete system operation ATTENTION TIf you use the Sector Reassignment function be aware that it does have one undesirable feature Some of the sectors that stored the original file will be lost from the Sector Allocation tables These lost sectors cannot be reclaimed until an initialization of the complete drive is accomplished This will necessitate a complete save initialization and reload operation Fortunately it can be scheduled as a planned activity 12 02 History Module Service 102 5 3 9 Redundant Drive Data Error Recovery Redundant drive data error recovery when the sector is not known This failure could be a drive s electronic failure or it could be a sector related problem where the software is unable to identify the sector address In either case an exact diagnosis is not possible without shutting down the History Module and running the HVTS off line tests One attempt to synch the drive should be made in case the error was transient in nature If this is successful the problem is resolved If not HVTS is required or the drive must be replaced The drive can be replaced while the History Module continues full operation using the redundant backup drive Replacing the defective drive while its redundant partne
7. ATTENTION Single drive 875 MB Drive 5 51196680 100 Use Figures 9 18 through 9 21 to determine the pinning for the nonredundant 875 MB drive s ATTENTION Your History Module will contain one of two types of 875 megabyte drives They are easily identified by their appearance and the Honeywell part number 51196680 100 or 51196680 200 on the drive Be sure that you use the pinning procedure that matches the drive In a nonredundant single drive configuration a single 875 MB drive is mounted in the front position on the tray assembly in one Winchester Drive Module Figure 9 18 illustrates the location and configuration of the jumper blocks on the 875 MB drive 51196680 100 The drive must be configured for a SCSI bus address of 5 on the SCSI Address J5 jumper block Also note the location of the jumper s on the Option Select J2 jumper block The SCSI Address J5 jumper block must have jumpers in positions 1 and 3 for correct addressing The Option Select J2 jumper block must have a jumper in position 5 to enable data parity checking a jumper in position 1 to enable the SCSI bus terminators on the drive and a jumper between positions 7 and 8 to enable power from the SCSI bus for the bus terminators The SCSI Address Remote J6 jumper block must have no jumpers installed on it Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 187 9 5 4 Single Dual 875 MB Drive Pinning
8. 16729 B 12 02 History Module Service 226 9 7 1 4 Single 1 8 GB Drive Pinning Overview Single 1 8 GB drive pinning Drive 5 Drive 4 SCSI bus termination Redundant single drive configuration is similar in appearance to the nonredundant dual drive configuration The differences are in address pinning SCSI bus termination and cabling Each drive is housed in a separate Winchester Drive Module The configuration of a History Module with redundant single 1 8 gigabyte drives is illustrated in Figure 9 31 The drives are located in the front positions on the tray assembly in both drive chassis and must be pinned as drive 5 upper drive chassis and drive 4 lower drive chassis as illustrated in Figures 9 46 and Figure 9 47 respectively Note the positions of the configuration jumpers on the drives If necessary reposition the jumpers e The SCSI Address J6 jumper block must have jumpers installed in positions AO and A2 for correct addressing e The Option Select J2 jumper block must not have any jumpers installed on it e The SCSI Address J6 jumper block must have a jumper installed in position A2 for correct addressing e The Option Select J2 jumper block must not have any jumpers installed on it The internal SCSI bus terminators on either drive must not be enabled Bus termination is provided at the drive end of the SCSI bus cable by a bus terminator card Continu
9. ccccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeteeeees 16 History Module Reset Procedure eecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeenenaeeeeeeaas 78 Troubleshooting Procedure History Module Operates Intermittently 79 Troubleshooting Procedure History Module Will Not Boot 82 Troubleshooting Procedure Kernel Circuit Board Alphanumeric Display VS Uae ce AE chores cette EE A E N ETE 83 Troubleshooting Procedure History Module Node Status Errors 84 Maintenance Recommendation Messages cccecesteeeeeneeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 86 WREN Ill 210 445 875 MB and 1 8 GB Drive 87 Drive Primary and Secondary Error Codes c cccesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 89 Drive Sense Keys Sense COdes cesccceecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesaaeeeeaeeeeneeenaees 90 WREN III 210 445 875 MB and 1 8 GB Drive Recommended Corrective ACTION seria enterra ainar nE EET AEE REE AEA 92 Real Time Journal RTJ Messages sessseeeessrssrerrssrrrssrrnssrrrnssrns 93 History Module Error Recovery Reference Manuals cceeseeeeee 97 History Module Personality Loading Procedure sssi 98 Data Error Recovery Procedure Init Reload Not Required 101 Data Error Recovery Procedure Init Reload Required 000 102 Redundant Drive Data Error Recovery Procedure 103 Redundant Drive Data Error Recovery Procedure 104 Drive 5 or 3 Control Track Error Recovery Procedure Redunda
10. 12 02 History Module Service 134 7 3 1 Winchester Disk Drive Removal continued 210 megabyte drive jumper blocks Figure 7 4 is an illustration of the 210 megabyte Winchester hard disk drive showing the locations of the various jumper blocks All of the jumper blocks should be checked for proper positioning of the jumpers based upon the drive s mounting location on a tray The Options and Parity Remote Start jumper blocks have fixed jumper positions for all drive mounting positions Three of the jumper blocks must be altered if necessary to accommodate the mounting location of the drive on either a right hand or left hand tray front or rear position These are the Active Passive Termination Terminator Power and SCSI Drive Address jumper blocks Table 7 1 and Figure 7 4 illustrate the proper positioning of the jumpers on each jumper block for the drive s mounting position Table 7 1 210 Megabyte Drive SCSI Device Address Selection Device Tray SCSI Device Address Jumper Position Location Left Hand Rear 2 3 to 4 Right Hand Rear 3 3 to 4 and 5 to 6 Left Hand Front 4 1 to2 Right Hand Front 5 1 to 2 and 5to6 Replacement drives are shipped from the factory pinned for a SCSI device address of 5 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 135 7 3 1 Winchester Disk Drive Removal continued 210 megabyte drive The locations of the jumper blocks on the drive a
11. 12 02 History Module Service 57 3 6 2 Dual Disk Drives Configuration continued SPC to drive tray Figure 3 14 illustrates the components and interconnections between the interconnections SPC circuit board and the drives Figure 3 14 Redundant Dual Drive History Module Interconnections Slot 2 Front Special Peripheral Controller SPC Board Backplane Connector Slot 2 Rear SPCII I O Board Slot 5 Rear WDI I O Board Tet He Se eee ee Sees Backplane Connector lt Slot 5 Front Winchester Drive Interface WDI Board Drive 2 Drive 3 Rear Disk Rear Disk Drive Drive 1 SCSI Bus SCSI Bus Printed Printed i Flex Circuit Flex Circuit Drive 4 Mt Drive 5 Front Disk Drive Front Disk Drive Bus Terminators Primary Bus Terminators Primary Left Hand Winchester Drive Tray Right Hand Winchester Drive Tray se a ee a a aa as A a a Se a ss ee ee ee ee ee ALSO A OA a A 12 02 History Module Service 58 3 7 Field Adjustments Field Adjustments There are no field adjustments required for the WDA History Module s electronics or Winchester disk drives 12 02 History Module Service 59 12 02 History Module Service 60 Section 4 WDA History Module With Type II Drive Tray 4 1 Overview Section contents The topics covered in t
12. Alphanumeric display Sequential Troubleshooting continued If the Alphanumeric display on the EMPU HMPU HPK2 K2LCN K4LCN Is 1xx circuit board shows 1xx use Table 5 4 to identify the problem Table 5 4 Troubleshooting Procedure Kernel Circuit Board Alphanumeric Display is 1xx Indication Possible Cause Solution 190 Power to a Winchester Be sure all the cables are firmly in place and Drive Tray is removed or power is applied to the Winchester Drive Tray s the power cable to a drive Check the SMCC and RTJ journals is disconnected The volume configuration Be sure to initialize the History Module after the on the system NCF has volume configuration on the system NCF is been altered without the altered This is an error in procedure It is not user also initializing the an equipment failure History Module 176 amp HMO may not have been Review Task 16 in the System Startup Guide copied to the local volume This is an error in procedure It is not an 9NP equipment failure A drive is suspect Call TAC and discuss the problem 177 183 193 The History Module Autoboot the History Module 178 184 194 personality software is corrupted 179 185 195 Go to Table 5 3 if the autoboot is not successful 189 Call TAC if error 189 is repeated 18C 188 BOOT MS 18A a QLT file a personality file 18E an OFT file 18F bad checksum in any file The file is mi
13. WDI SPC2 CLCN A B Left Hand Tray Ribbon Cable Tray Power Switch Fan Assembly Right Hand Tray FRONT VIEW Node Power Switch Reset Button REAR VIEW 16758 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 65 4 2 Description Continued WDA History Module block diagram Figure 4 4 is a block diagram of the WDA History Module illustrating the path between the LCN and the Winchester disk drives A functional description of the enhanced Five Slot Module chassis that provides the electronics for the WDA History Module hardware can be found in the Five Ten Slot Module Service manual Figure 4 4 WDA History Module Block Diagram WDI I O SCSI Bus p a j SS a a a Ribbon Cables Left Tray Right Tray a K2LCN gt LCN I O Power Supply 5 V 24V HM Fan t r LCN A Coax t r LCN B Coax ocu mrecuooz 12 V Optional Disk Drives 17695 12 02 History Module Service 66 4 3 Physical Configuration Winchester disk drives SCSI bus interconnections SCSI bus termination A Winchester hard disk drive is mounted on each Winchester Drive Tray resident in the Winchester Disk Assembly that occupies the upper two circuit board slots slots 4 and 5 of the module as illustrated in Figures 4 2 and 4 3 Dual Small Computer Systems Interface SCSI bus ribbon cables connect the
14. History Module Service 122 6 4 1 Fan Assembly Removal Procedure Remove the fan assembly 1 by turning the two bale headed fasteners and sliding the assembly out of the module chassis 6 4 2 Slide Tray Assembly Removal ATTENTION Disassembly procedure ATTENTION If power to a drive is switched off unexpectedly the software will time out and continue CAUTION Allow at least a 30 second drive spin down time before attempting to remove a Winchester Drive tray If a drive is jarred while its disks are spinning there is head crash potential Referencing Figure 6 1 use the following procedure to remove the slide out tray assembly from the Winchester Drive Module 1 Place the Drive Power Supply switch in the 0 OFF position Note that the indicator on the drive power supply extinguishes Release the cable clamp s that hold the SCSI bus ribbon cable in place inside the module chassis Go to the back of the History Module and release any other appropriate SCSI bus cable clamps Disconnect the SCSI bus cable connector from the failed disk drive 5 on the tray assembly Note the dress of the ribbon cable and the orientation of the ribbon cable connector as it connects to the drive In particular note the orientation of the red stripe on the ribbon cable It is to the right when facing the drive s connector side If there is a second drive on the same tray assembly disconnect its ribbon cable als
15. There are no connector retainers Hold the drive you are installing in place with your hand and invert the tray so that the tray is resting on the drive Reposition the tray carefully so that the desired set of drive mounting holes front or rear align with the four tapped holes at the bottom of the drive as illustrated in Figure 10 20 for the 210 megabyte drive Figure 10 21 illustrates the 445 MB 875 MB and 1 8 GB drives They are similar in appearance If the tray does not have another drive already mounted on it you will have to support one end of the tray while you tighten the screws Install only the three Phillips head screws as illustrated in Figure 10 19 or 10 20 Only three screws are used to accommodate any warpage in the tray s construction affecting the drive Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 264 10 4 2 Winchester Disk Drive Replacement continued 210 MB drive mounting Figure 10 20210 Megabyte Drive Mounting 445 875 MB and 1 8 GB drive mounting Figure 10 21445 875 Megabyte and 1 8 Gigabyte Drive Mounting Rear Side of Drive Connector Side 6 32 1 4 Inch Screws 12491 12 02 History Module Service 265 12 02 History Module Service 266 Section 11 Dual Logical WDA History Module Assembly 11 1 Overview Section contents The topics covered in this section are Topic See Page 11 1 11 2 11 2 1 11 2 2 11
16. Winchester disk drives are included in both the WREN and the 210 445 875 megabyte and 1 8 gigabyte parts list because the WREN type of History Module can be upgraded to accommodate the 210 megabyte 445 megabyte 875 megabyte or 1 8 gigabyte drive Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 301 13 2 WREN type History Module parts list Replaceable Parts Lists continued the service part level Table 13 1 lists part numbers for the WREN Winchester Drive Modules at Table 13 1 WREN Type Drive History Module Parts List Item Description Part Number 1 Fan Assembly includes fans 51400646 100 2 Winchester Drive Module Power Cord 120 Vac 51303421 092 2 Winchester Drive Module Power Cord 240 Vac 51303629 092 3 Cable from Slide Tray Assembly Connector to Fan Assembly 51303549 100 4 Winchester Drive Module Power Supply 51107595 100 5 WREN III Hard Disk Drive 51195155 100 TO 210 Megabyte Hard Disk Drive includes installation instructions 51196269 100 5 445 Megabyte Hard Disk Drive includes installation instructions 51196351 100 875 Megabyte Hard Disk Drive includes installation instructions 51196720 100 5 1 8 Gigabyte Hard Disk Drive includes installation instructions 51196897 100 6 Power Cable from Drive Power Supply to Disk Drives 51303536 061 Power Cable from Drive Power Supply to Fan Cable 51303625 019 7 SCSI Bus Ribbon Cable for single WREN III 2
17. circuit board which is held in place by five Phillips head screws located at the corners and the forward center of the board and available through access holes at the top of the assembly chassis There is a spacer used with each fastener The spacers are very important when mounting the circuit board because without the spacers the circuit board will not mate properly with its backpanel connectors Since it is very difficult to install the WDI circuit board using spacers it is recommended that the circuit board not be replaced in the field Instead the Winchester Disk Assembly should be replaced if it is suspected that the circuit board has failed The WDI circuit board cannot be ordered as a spare part 12 02 History Module Service 156 8 3 Overview General Winchester Drive Tray Disassembly These instructions cover the disassembly of the right hand or left hand Winchester Drive Tray and the removal of the Winchester disk drive s mounted on the tray In a nonredundant History Module configuration the left hand Winchester Drive Tray will not be present A Winchester Drive Tray can contain one single drive or two dual drives You are probably removing a Winchester Drive Tray and replacing a drive because you were informed by the History Module Status display that a DISKPROB exists If you have redundant drives be sure you request status from the Command Processor to verify the address of the failed drive whi
18. front or rear position These are the Option Select J2 and SCSI Address J6 jumper blocks Table 10 5 and Figure 10 19 illustrate the proper positioning of the jumpers on both jumper blocks J2 and J6 for the drive s mounting position Table 10 5 1 8 Gigabyte Drive SCSI Device Address Selection Device Tray SCSI Device Address Jumper Position Location Left Hand Rear 2 2 Right Hand Rear 3 1 and 2 Left Hand Front 4 3 Right Hand Front 5 1 and 3 Replacement drives are shipped from the factory pinned for a SCSI device address of 5 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 262 10 4 2 Winchester Disk Drive Replacement continued 1 8 gigabyte drive The locations of the jumper blocks on the drive are illustrated in eee Figure 10 19 The Options Select J2 and SCSI Address J6 jumper blocks should be altered as appropriate SCSI drive addresses of 2 3 4 and 5 are the only valid addresses Figure 10 19 1 8 Gigabyte Drive Jumper Block Selections Bottom View SCSI Bus Address Jumper Block Option Jumper Block See Address Selection Table Drives 4 and 5 i PWB J2 Drive Bottom Option Jumper Block Drives 2 and 3 4 PWB TE DSME WP PD SS TP_TP DC Power I O Connector Connector J1 5 Vdc 5 Volts Return 12 Volts Return 12 Vdc 16725 B Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 263 10 4 2 Winchester Disk Drive Repl
19. 1 CAUTION Read all of the following five considerations before proceeding with the troubleshooting and repair of the History Module DO NOT USE A DISK DRIVE FROM ANOTHER HISTORY MODULE AS A REPLACEMENT for a drive in a redundant History Module unless you format the replacement drive using the off line Hardware Verification Test System HVTS When a drive contains an existing file system and is used as a replacement it can corrupt the file system in the redundant History Module in which it is installed Replacement drives received from the factory will not cause this problem because they are formatted before shipment Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 77 5 2 Test St rategy Continued Consideration 2 Consideration 3 Consideration 4 Consideration 5 CAUTION Use a strategy DO NOT INITIALIZE A REDUNDANT HISTORY MODULE unless power is applied to all drives If power is removed from a redundant drive and the History Module is initialized with a reduced number of volumes available the existing file system can be corrupted when power is applied to the drive after initialization DO NOT REMOVE POWER FROM THE HISTORY MODULE OR THE DISK DRIVES before you do a node shutdown from the Universal Station DO THE PRELIMINARY CHECKS in the next subsection before you remove power When power is removed you may lose important fault and error information pertinent to the problem DO NOT PRES
20. 1 2 Support Services and DOCUMENTS ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeteaeeeeaeeeeaeeteneees 17 SECTION 2 WREN TYPE HISTORY MODULE DESCRIPTION cssccsseeesseeeeseees 19 2 1 OVERVIOW E E eel cep ettideveee Dh tenead chad teve A A 19 2 2 Nonredundant Drive History MOdUIeS ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeenas 21 2 2 1 WREN III History Module DeSCription eececeeeeeteeeeeeeteeeeeteeeeeenaeeeeee 21 2 2 2 210 445 875 MB and 1 8 GB History Module Description 0 000 27 2 3 Redundant Drive History Modules c ececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeeeeeeenaees 33 2 3 1 Redundant Single Disk Drive Configuration ccccceeeeeeeeeteeeseeeeeeeeeeees 35 2 3 2 Redundant Dual Drive Configuration ccccccecseeeeceeereeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaees 38 SECTION 3 WDA TYPE HISTORY MODULE WITH TYPE I DRIVE cesseeeeees 41 3 1 OVEIVIOW s r el tie tia ails titi ati atin tits naa 41 3 3 Physical Configuration c cccccccecceeeeeseeceeeeeceeeeeaeeeeneeseeeeesaeeeaeseeneeesaees 47 3 4 Circuit Board Configuration 0 ccccseceeeceeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeseaeeneeeseeeees 49 3 5 Nonredundant Drive History Module Configuration cseeeeeeeee 50 3 5 1 Single Disk Drive Configuration ccecccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeneeeseeneees 50 3 5 2 Dual Disk Drives Configuration 0 ccccesceeeeceeceeeeeeneeseeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeeneeenaees 52 3 6 Redunda
21. 1 8 GB Drive 3 Jumper Block Selections Bottom View 196 Single 210 445 875 MB or 1 8 GB Drive SCSI Cable Routing Top View 198 Single 210 445 875 MB or 1 8 GB Drive SCSI Bus Cable Routing Side NIEN i teces oblast veel oath et uate E E 199 Dual 210 445 875 MB or 1 8 GB Drive SCSI Cable Routing Side View 200 Redundant Drive Positioning and Address Assignment 0eeee 202 Redundant Single WREN III Drive Configuration s s s eseese 204 Redundant Single WREN III Drive SCSI Bus Cable Routing Side View 205 Terminator Card Guide Assembly ccccceeeeeceseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeneeeeneeeeaas 206 Redundant Single WREN III Drive SCSI Bus Cable Installation Front KE AERE E Scot E sie denen E Mee E ss cae E beset ate lke 207 Redundant Single WREN III Drive SCSI Bus Cable Installation Top VION 2c anche acs sceteadusehenasscedesasusenieadysd sansa sen beraays peqasdecabaedan senaaacheeias eboney 208 Redundant Dual WREN III Drive Configuration ccccceeeseeeereeee 210 Redundant Dual WREN III Drive SCSI Bus Cable Routing Side View 212 Redundant Dual WREN III Drive SCSI Cable Installation Top View 213 Redundant 210 445 875 or 1 8 GB Drive Positioning cseeceee 214 Nonterminated 210 MB Drive 5 Jumper Block Selections Bottom View 216 Nonterminated 210 MB Drive 4 Jumper Block Selections Bottom View 217 Nonterminated 445 MB Drive 5 Jumper Block Selections Bottom View 219 Nonterminated 445 MB D
22. 12 4 Redundant Disk Drive Data Synchronization ccccccccceseeeeseeeeeeeeeees 294 12 5 Winchester Disk Drive Formatting cccccceeceeeeeeeceeeeseeeeeeeteneeeeeeneeees 296 12 5 1 Drive Formatting Procedure 00 ceccceecceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeneaas 297 SECTION 13 SPARE PARTS iicccccscccesscnsceteced ceeccsceeeteceteceedscaeestececcoceeteveescesesnerenteceense 301 13 1 OVGIVICW fsiccic ha teil elt AS ead ecg tee 301 13 2 Replaceable Parts Lists cesccceceesececeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeceeesneneeeeessneeeennnnees 301 12 02 History Module Service vii Figures Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 Figure 2 3 Figure 2 4 Figure 2 5 Figure 2 6 Figure 2 7 Figure 2 8 Figure 2 9 Figure 2 10 Figure 2 11 Figure 2 12 Figure 2 13 Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 3 4 Figure 3 5 Figure 3 6 Figure 3 7 Figure 3 8 Figure 3 9 Figure 3 10 Figure 3 11 Figure 3 12 Figure 3 13 Figure 3 14 Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 Figure 4 4 Figure 4 5 Figure 4 6 Figure 4 7 Figure 4 8 Figure 4 9 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 Figure 5 5 Figure 5 6 Figure 5 7 Figure 5 8 Figure 5 9 Figure 5 10 Figure 6 1 Figure 6 2 Figure 7 1 Figure 7 2 Figure 7 3 Figure 7 4 Figure 7 5 Figure 7 6 Figure 7 7 Figure 7 8 Dual WREN III Drive History Module Five Slot Module cee 21 WREN III Drive Positioning and Address Assignment eeeeeeeees 23 Single WREN II
23. 13 Bottom View of 210 MB Drive with SCSI Bus Terminator Modules Installed Pin 1 Dot or Part Numbe on Top Side Square Pad on PWB Indicates Pin 1 6762 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 179 9 5 2 Single Dual 210 MB Drive Pinning Continued Dual drive pinning In a dual drive configuration two 210 MB drives can be housed in separate Winchester Drive Modules or the same module Drive 5 is mounted in the front position on the tray assembly in the upper module module 2 or the only module and has a SCSI bus address of 5 Figure 9 12 illustrates the location and configuration of the jumper blocks on Drive 5 Use the single drive pinning instructions to properly configure the drive Termination resistor modules must be installed on Drive 5 as illustrated in Figure 9 13 The second drive Drive 3 is mounted in the front position on the tray assembly in the lower module module 1 if there are two modules or the rear position if there is a single module and has a SCSI bus address of 3 Also note the location of the jumpers on the Active Passive Termination jumper block Figure 9 14 illustrates the location and configuration of the jumper blocks on Drive 3 The SCSI Drive Address jumper block must have jumpers between pins 3 and 4 and pins 5 and 6 for correct addressing The Active Passive Termination jumper block must have no jumpers because no SCSI bus termination resist
24. 28 06 2 ENGINEERING PERSONALITY MAIN MENU BUTTON CONFIGURATIO HM HISTORY GROUPS vorume conricuraTign __ DOCUMENTATION TOO O BUILDER COMMANDS ARED DATABASE Support Functions and Utility Functions PORED SYSTEM MEN SYSTEM STATUB CONSOLE STATU PROCESSOR P P SUPPORT UTILITIES R400 C Honeywell Inc 19B 6134 The SMCC Main Menu display is illustrated in Figure 5 8 Figure 5 8 SMCC Main Menu Display 14 Jul 91 12 55 29 SMCC MAIN MENU MODULE MEMORY HIWAY BOX MEMORY PROBE FAILED MODULH SYSTEM MAINT JOURNA ACTIVE MAINT JOURNA MODULE ERROR REV CONFIG STATUS sectoR INIT REASSIGH MAIN MENU For Information On Funtions And Options Displayed On this Menu Position The Cursor On the Desired Target And Press HELP 6135 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 115 5 3 13 Sector Initialization Reassignment Procedure continued Sector Initialization The Sector Initialization Reassignment Menu display is illustrated in Reassignment Menu Figure 5 9 display Figure 5 9 Sector Initialization Reassignment Menu Display 23 Jul 91 21 15 47 1 SECTOR INITIALIZATION REASSIGNMENT PARAMETERS Module Number E 1 To 96 Drive Number 0 0 To 7 Sector Number L 1 To 99999999 Sector Initialize Sector Reassign WARNING Use of Function Will Permanently Reassign Sector on the Requested HM This Should Only Be Used After receipt
25. 280 11 2 6 Winchester Disk Assembly Replacement WDA replacement As illustrated in Figure 11 1 the Winchester Disk Assembly 4 occupies slots 4 and 5 in the History Module chassis Figure 11 9 is an illustration of the assembly The Winchester Disk Assembly connectors mate with the backpanel connectors in the slot 5 position but is guided into position by the circuit board guide rails for the slot 4 position Grasping the metal partition dividing the tray compartments with the tray s disengaged or removed is a convenient way of inserting the assembly into its backpanel connectors The friction of the backpanel connectors tends to hold the assembly in place However two fasteners located toward the front of each side of the assembly secure it in place The fan assembly must be removed to have access for the right hand side fastener Figure 11 9 Winchester Disk Assembly 12 02 History Module Service 281 11 3 Winchester Disk Assembly Reassembly Description Tray removal and replacement WDI circuit board Tray installation As illustrated in the exploded view of the Winchester Disk Assembly Figure 11 10 the assembly is composed of a chassis 1 a Winchester Drive Interface WDD circuit board 2 and one or two Winchester Drive Trays right hand 3 and left hand 4 that reside in the chassis The trays are physically interchangeable assemblies but must be properly configured for their applicat
26. Block Drive 5 Terminated PWB TE DSME WP PD SS TP TP 16726 B Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 189 9 5 4 Single Dual 875 MB Drive Pinning continued Dual drives 875 MB Drive 3 51196680 100 In a dual drive configuration two 875 MB drives can be housed in separate Winchester Drive Modules or the same module The first drive Drive 5 is mounted in the front position on the tray assembly in the upper module module 2 or the only module and has a SCSI bus address of 5 Figure 9 18 or 9 19 illustrates the location and configuration of the jumper blocks on Drive 5 Use the single drive pinning instructions to properly configure the drive The second drive Drive 3 is mounted in the front position on the tray assembly in the lower module module 1 if there are two modules or the rear position if there is a single module and has a SCSI bus address of 3 Figure 9 20 illustrates the location and configuration of the jumper blocks on Drive 3 51196680 100 The drive must be configured for a SCSI bus address of 3 on the SCSI Address J5 jumper block Also note the location of the jumper s on the Option Select J2 jumper block The SCSI Address J5 jumper block must have jumpers installed in positions 1 and 2 for correct addressing The Option Select J2 jumper block must have a jumper installed in position 5 to enable data parity checking The SCSI
27. Drive Module with power supply is used to house each WREN III drive when a second drive can be accommodated in a single Winchester Drive Module If data is being written to a WREN III drive at the same instant that AC power fails there must be a way to provide power to the drive until it has had time to complete the write cycle and avoid corrupted data The Winchester disk drive power supply is designed with sufficient ride through power to sustain power for a single WREN III drive but not enough capability for two drives For this reason a single power supply is allocated for each WREN III drive that must record unduplicated data Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 25 2 2 1 WREN III History Module Description continued Dual WREN III drive interconnections Figure 2 4 Dual WREN III Drive History Module Components and Interconnections SPC I O WREN III 51304156 100 SCSI Bus Cable 51304379 100 Power Cord SCSI Bus Terminator Installed on Drive 5 Last Drive on Bus Drive 5 Rear View i Power Supply OS eens ea i Winchester Drive Module 2 Top View l a Power Cord SCSI Bus Terminator Removed from Drive 3 Drive 3 Rear View be es booo za A eA Winchester Drive Module 1 SCSI Bus Cable Top View Connector DC Power Connector Cable 51303536 061 16753 Winchester Drive Top View f Power Supply
28. Drive Modules Figure 2 1 Dual WREN III Drive History Module Five Slot Module Winchester Modules Electronics Module 1761 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 21 2 2 1 WREN III History Module Description continued WREN III hardware configurations WREN Ill electronics module configuration The WREN III drive is identified by the rectangular shape of the hard drive mounted on top and by the smooth sides of its chassis As illustrated in Figure 2 1 there are no cooling holes in the sides The Winchester Drive Module and the electronics module are always mounted one above the other as illustrated in the Figure 2 1 A single ribbon cable from the SPC I O circuit board at the rear of the electronics module enters a slot at the rear of the lower Winchester Drive Module routes over the slide tray assembly and connects to the WREN III drive s on the tray assembly The cable then exits the lower module and enters the upper Winchester Drive Module where it connects to the drive s on the tray assembly In the standard nonredundant configurations the SCSI Small Computer Systems Interface often nicknamed scuzzy bus ribbon cable interconnects to one or two drives The drive at the end of the SCSI bus interface cable has a bus terminator module installed on it The SCSI bus ribbon cable is a group of transmission lines that must be terminated at each end on the SPC I O c
29. Field Adjustments A History Module can have redundant disk drives History Modules that contain WREN II 210 MB 445 MB 875 MB or 1 8 GB disk drives accommodate redundancy Data is stored on the redundant hard disk drives almost simultaneously If one hard disk drive should fail the other drive has the identical database stored intact and can support continuous operation of the History Module until the failed drive is repaired or replaced For more information on redundant drives go to subsection 2 3 There are no field adjustments required for the History Module s electronics or Winchester disk drives 12 02 History Module Service 20 2 2 2 2 1 Overview Nonredundant Drive History Modules WREN Ill History Module Description Figure 2 1 illustrates a WREN III History Module containing dual WREN II Winchester disk drives The electronics module illustrated is a standard LCN Five Slot Module but a Dual Node Module can also be a component of a WREN III History Module Each of the two Winchester Drive Modules occupy the same space as a Five Slot Module but they contain slide out tray assemblies on which a WREN III drive is mounted Each Winchester Drive Module has its own drive power supply that is mounted at the left side of the tray assembly The WREN III History Module supports both redundant and nonredundant configurations Depending upon the configuration the History Module consists of one or two Winchester
30. III 210 MB 445 MB 875 MB or 1 8 GB drive routes over the tray assembly between the drive and the fan assembly The cable for WREN III drives is slipped under the edge of the drive s or clamped to the tray assembly for 210 MB 445 MB 875 MB or 1 8 GB drive to prevent it from interfering with the rotating fan blades Once all the ribbon cables have been disconnected you can fully remove the tray assembly from the module chassis and place it on a work surface for further disassembly 12 02 History Module Service 120 6 3 3 Power Supply Disk Drive Removal Disassembly Referencing Figure 6 1 use the following procedures to disassemble the procedure power supply and or disk drives 1 Ifreplacing the power supply assembly 4 tag and remove the wires connected to the power supply s terminal board 6 Detach the power supply from the tray assembly by removing four screws lock washers and flat washers from beneath the tray assembly 2 If replacing a disk drive 5 pay particular attention to the position of the jumpers and the presence or absence of a bus terminator module WREN IID or bus termination resistor modules 210 MB or 445 MB on the drive These subjects are covered in detail in Section 7 3 Disconnect the drive s power cable Detach the drive by removing four screws lock washers and flat washers from beneath the tray assembly 12 02 History Module Service 121 6 4 Redundant Winchester Driv
31. Mount 6 Split Lock 6 32 x 1 25 2090 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 165 9 3 3 Disk Drive Replacement continued 210 445 875 MB and 1 8 GB Drive mounting The 210 MB 445 MB 875 MB and 1 8 GB drive requires an adapter plate to mount the drive on the tray assembly The drive is orientated with its connectors to the right side of the tray assembly No shock mounts are required Figure 9 3 illustrates the attachment of the adapter plate to the drive Three 6 32 1 4 inch screws are used to attach the plate Figure 9 4 illustrates the mounting of the drive adapter plate on the tray assembly Four M3 5 x 10 mm screws and four flat washers are used in the process Figure 9 3 Assembly of Adapter Plate to Drive Rear Side of Drive Connector Side amp 6 32 1 4 Inch Screws 11838 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 166 9 3 3 Drive mounting Disk Drive Replacement continued Figure 9 4 Mounting the 210 445 875 MB or 1 8 GB Drive on the Tray Assembly Self Locking PEM Nut on Plate Drive Adapter Plate 51196226 100 Original Shock Mount Hole in Assembly T N TR 3 5 mm Flat Washer 51108390 004 3 5 x 10 mm Machine Screw 51108385 410 Notes 1 Set the tray assembly on its side with the drive power supply at the bottom 2 Mount the drive adapter plate using the screws and washers provided Ensu
32. OFF position for approximately 30 seconds then back to the ON position If the autoboot is unsuccessful go to the troubleshooting techniques in Section 5 or call TAC for assistance 12 02 History Module Service 291 12 3 2 Nonredundant Drive Replacement Startup WREN type HM Use the procedure in Table 12 3 when replacing a nonredundant drive in startup procedure a WREN type History Module Table 12 3 Restarting a WREN Type History Module Procedure Nonredundant Drive Replacement Step Action 1 In the Winchester Drive Module place the drive power supply s AC POWER switch in the 1 ON position The green LED on the power supply should be lit Check that the red LED on the fan assembly is not lit Secure the cover s to the module s Place the POWER switch on the electronics module in the ON 1 position Check that all red LEDs extinguish and all green LEDs illuminate within 1 5 minutes Also note the alphanumeric display and ensure that it displays the proper LCN node address for the History Module If you replaced a defective drive with a factory replacement the drive has been formatted at the factory If you replaced a defective drive with a drive previously used in another History Module the drive must be reformatted Reformat the drive using the procedure in subsection 12 5 before continuing You must now initialize the History Module using the original NCF you saved before the d
33. The dot on the module that identifies pin 1 and or the part number must be visible It is possible to reverse the orientation of the modules The modules provide end termination for the SCSI bus when the Winchester Drive Tray is present With the tray removed resistor terminators on the Winchester Drive Interface WDD circuit board in the Winchester Dive Assembly provide the bus termination Figure 10 16Bottom View of 445 MB Drive with SCSI Bus Terminators Pin 1 Dot or Part Number on Top 12492 12 02 History Module Service 256 10 4 2 Winchester Disk Drive Replacement continued ATTENTION 875 MB drive jumper blocks 51196680 100 ATTENTION Your History Module will contain one of two types of 875 megabyte drives They are easily identified by their appearance and the Honeywell part number 51196680 100 or 51196680 200 on the drive Be sure that you use the pinning procedure that matches the drive Figure 10 17 is an illustration of the 875 megabyte Winchester drive 51196680 100 showing the locations of the three jumper blocks The jumper blocks should be checked for proper positioning of the jumpers based upon the drive s mounting location on a tray The SCSI Address Remote J6 jumper block is not used in any drive mounting positions There should be no jumpers installed on the jumper block Two jumper blocks must be altered if necessary to accommodate the mounting location of the
34. The drive mounted at the front on the right hand primary Winchester Drive Tray is labeled Drive 5 in Figure 3 13 and must be pinned configured for SCSI bus address 5 The redundant partner mounted at the front on the left hand secondary Winchester Drive Tray is labeled Drive 4 and must be pinned configured for SCSI bus address 4 The drive mounted at the rear on the right hand primary Winchester Drive Tray is labeled Drive 3 in Figure 3 13 and must be pinned configured for SCSI bus address 3 The redundant partner mounted at the rear on the left hand secondary Winchester Drive Tray is labeled Drive 2 and must be pinned for SCSI bus address 2 Pinning of the drives is discussed in subsection 11 4 2 Figure 3 13 Redundant Dual Drive Configuration Drive 3 Drive 2 f Drive 3 Drive 2 CT Drive 4 Drive 5 Drive 4 CT Redundant Dual Drives 12822 The SCSI bus termination modules must be installed on the bottom of front 210 megabyte and 445 megabyte drives The rear drives must not have bus termination modules installed on them The terminators installed on Drives 4 and 5 terminate the two ends of the SCSI bus The 875 megabyte and 1 8 gigabyte drives do not have bus termination modules Instead internal bus terminators are enabled electronically on the drive by jumper block selection See subsection 11 4 2 for detailed installation information Continued on next page
35. WREN III drive configurations The drive mounted in the Winchester Drive Module is designated Drive 5 referred to as Device 5 and must be pinned configured for address 5 It is the only drive The drive is always assigned address 5 and is mounted in a single Winchester Drive Module Figure 2 2 illustrates the mounting position and address assignment of the drive on the tray assembly Figure 2 2 WREN III Drive Positioning and Address Assignments Drive 5 Drive 5 Address 5 Address 5 Drive 3 Address 3 Single Drive History Module Dual Drive History Module 16751 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 23 2 2 1 WREN III History Module Description continued Single WREN Ill drive Figure 2 3 illustrates the components and interconnections between the interconnections SPC I O circuit board and a single WREN III drive A bus terminator module must be installed at the rear of the drive Figure 2 3 Single WREN III Drive History Module Components and Interconnections SPC I O WREN III 51304156 100 SCSI Bus Cable 51304379 100 SCSI Bus Terminator Installed on Drive 5 Last Drive on Bus ein A Lh Drive 5 Rear View C oa Se Winchester Drive Module 2 Top View H Power Cord SCSI Bus Terminator Winchester Drive Removed from Drive 3 Top View Drive 3 Rear View rom 2 3 n e D z 5 a O T
36. Winchester Drive Module 1 SCSI Bus Cable Top View Connector DC Power Connector Cable 51303536 061 16753 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 24 2 2 1 WREN III History Module Description continued Dual WREN III drive configuration In a WREN III History Module with dual drives the drive mounted in the bottom Winchester Drive Module module 1 is designated Drive 3 and must be pinned for SCSI bus address 3 It is referred to as Device 3 The drive that is mounted in the top Winchester Drive Module module 2 is designated Drive 5 and must be pinned for SCSI bus address 5 It is referred to as Device 5 Figure 2 2 illustrates the drive positions and address assignments of the drives on the tray assemblies It is a conventional practice to have Device 3 in the lower Winchester module and Device 5 in the upper Winchester module Electrically it is possible for their locations to be reversed However to avoid confusion the standard configuration is recommended Figure 2 4 illustrates the components and interconnections between the SPC I O circuit board and the dual WREN III drives A bus terminator module must be installed on the drive that is at the end of the SCSI bus ribbon cable Drive 5 Device 5 A drive that is in the middle of the SCSI bus Drive 3 Device 3 must not have a bus terminator module installed on it It may appear excessive that a separate Winchester
37. a dual redundant configuration are OFFLINE Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 131 7 3 Winchester Drive Tray Disassembly continued Before beginning disassembly Before beginning disassembly consider whether or not the History Module has redundant drives If the module does not contain redundant drives power can be removed from the drive s mounted on the right hand Winchester Drive Tray at the power supply or the tray by placing their respective power ON OFF switch in the OFF position Should the History Module contain redundant drives then remove power only at the Winchester Drive Tray that contains the defective drive Disassemble the Winchester Drive Tray only to the extent necessary to replace a defective part The item numbers used in this subsection are keyed to ballooned numbers in Figures 7 2 and 7 3 Figure 7 2 Single Drive Winchester Drive Tray Exploded View Figure 7 3 Dual Drive Winchester Drive Tray Exploded View 6768 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 132 7 3 Winchester Drive Tray Disassembly continued Winchester Drive Tray description caution CAUTION The drive s mounted on the tray is an electrostatically sensitive device Use a grounding strap and grounded work surfaces equipment Store and transport parts only in electrostatically safe containers The Winchester Drive Tray contains the following componen
38. a new one it must be piined exactly like the old one 289 Secondary Code 98 sector 102 sector initialization reassignment 0 Sector Allocation tables 107 108 Sector Initialization Reassignment Menu display 122 Sense Key Code 98 Shipping Alerts 77 SHUTDOWN 23 33 161 single drive tray 141 single drive tray 254 SMCC Initialize Reassign Sector 105 SMCC Main Menu display 2 SMCC Maintenance Recommendation messages 84 software status displays 8 SPC 49 71 SPC 52 73 137 165 241 275 SPCII I O 242 276 SPCII I O SPC2 137 165 Status Detail display 91 114 Status Detail display 102 Subtest 14 710 Subtest 19 710 Subtest 21 710 support documents 17 services 17 SYNCH 0 111 12 02 History Module Service 308 Index SYNCH 0 synchronization 711 synchronization 298 System Maintenance Control Center SMCC 101 System Real Time Journal 58 77 System Status Error messages 91 T TAC 85 TAC 100 T connectors 137 165 Technical Assistance Center 85 termination modules 49 resistor modules 146 149 260 test run 84 transient problem 84 trunk cables 137 165 250 284 U unrecoverable data error 7102 V visual checkout 291 Volume Status display 105 Volume Status display 114 W WDA Drive Tray 16 WDA removal 138 166 WDI 250 252 284 286 WDI 49 71 138 141 166 169 replacement 128 138 166 WDI I O 49 137
39. activated which places them in parallel with the bus terminators installed on the drive Intermittent errors could occur 12 02 History Module Service 159 8 3 1 Winchester Disk Drive Removal General Drive removal When replacing a Winchester disk drive it is important that you duplicate all jumper block pinning on the drive Of particular interest is the SCSI bus address device and terminator pinning The replacement drive must be pinned identically The drive has a self locking protective mechanism that is activated when power is removed from the drive However the drive must be handled with great care Gently place the tray in an inverted position prior to removal of the drive Loosen and remove the three Phillips head screws on the bottom portion of the tray that attach the drive to the tray Holding the drive in place on the tray place the tray in an upright position The power and SCSI printed flex circuit connectors are friction mated with their respective connectors on the drive Separate the drive s SCSI connector from ribbon cable SCSI connector by gently prying them apart using a small screwdriver or similar tool The drive must be moved away from the printed flex circuit SCSI connector to prevent damage to the printed flex circuit Do not attempt to move the printed flex circuit SCSI connector away from the drive s connector Separate the power connector from its mating drive power connector D
40. cables 10 The friction fit connections are released by pulling outward on the individual connectors Do not pull on the ribbon cable itself The Local Control Network LCN trunk cables A and B connect to the LCN I O CLCN A B circuit board 7 in slot 1 at the rear of the History Module chassis by coaxial T connectors Do not disconnect the cables from the T connectors Disconnect only the T connectors from the board connectors Removal of an LCN trunk cable connector from its T connector interrupts the continuity of the network Note where cables A and B connect They are color coded yellow A and green B Do not cross the cable connections The K2LCN 11 or K4LCN 11 and SPC 12 circuit boards are removed by simultaneously pulling outward on the board extractors located on each side of the board and sliding the board out of the History Module chassis The I O circuit boards LCN I O CLCN A B 7 and SPCII I O SPC2 8 and the WDI I O WDI 9 are located at the rear of the History Module chassis in the module s I O card cage They are assigned to slots 1 2 and 5 respectively The circuit boards are removed by simultaneously pulling outward on the board extractors located on each side of the board and sliding the board out of the I O card cage 12 02 History Module Service 129 7 2 5 Winchester Disk Assembly Removal Description WDA removal WDI circuit board replacement The Wincheste
41. cables form a group of transmission lines and must be resistor terminated at each end of the SCSI bus The SPC circuit board contains no bus terminators since it is central to the bus Figure 4 5 illustrates the routing of the SCSI bus when both Winchester Drive Trays are present Figure 4 5 SCSI Bus and Termination Interconnections Slot 2 Front Smart Peripheral Controller SPC Board Backplane Connector SPCII I O Board Slot 2 Rear SCSI Bus Ribbon Cable Slot 5 Rear WDI I O Board SS a ee ee Backplane Connector 7 Slot 5 Front Winchester Drive Interface WD Board Drive 2 Partition Drive 3 Partition SCSI Cable 51305559 100 SCSI Cable 51305559 100 Drive 4 Partition Drive 5 Partition Terminator Terminator Left Hand Winchester Drive Tray Right Hand Winchester Drive Tray Jl J Winchester Disk Assembly eae a ee ee ee a a eS eS ee SS eS Se SS ee Se a 12 02 History Module Service 68 4 4 Circuit Board Configuration SPC circuit board WDI and WDI I O circuit boards K2LCN or K4LCN and LCN I O circuit boards Circuit board configuration The Smart Peripheral Controller SPC circuit board provides communication with and control of the Winchester disk drives and the SPC I O circuit board The SPC I O circuit board and the Winchester Drive I
42. continued Terminated 875 MB Drive 5 jumper block selections 51196680 100 Figure 9 18 Terminated 875 MB Drive 5 51196680 100 Jumper Block Selections Bottom View SCSI Address Remote Jumper Block SCSI Drive Address Not Used No Jumpers Jumper Block Jy J5 t Drive PWB 321 Bottom I J1 Bottom Option Select Jumper Block PWB J2 eeeDloee isin 5 Volts Return CD 0 12 Volts Return 12345678 12 Vdc 54020 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 188 9 5 4 Single Dual 875 MB Drive Pinning Continued 875 MB Drive 5 Figure 9 19 illustrates the location and configuration of the jumper blocks 51196680 200 on the 875 MB drive 51196680 200 The drive must be configured for a SCSI bus address of 5 on the SCSI Bus Address J6 jumper block Also note the location of the jumper s on the Option J2 jumper block The SCSI Address J5 jumper block must have jumpers in positions AO and A2 for correct addressing The Option J2 jumper block must have a jumper in position TE to enable the SCSI bus terminators on the drive and a jumper between the two TP positions to enable power from the SCSI bus for the bus terminators Terminated 875 MB Drive 5 jumper block selections 51196680 200 Figure 9 19 Terminated 875 MB Drive 5 51196680 200 Jumper Block Selections Bottom View SCSI Bus Address Jumper Block Drive 5 AO A1 A2 Option Jumper
43. drive configuration the SCSI bus cable from the SPC I O circuit board connects first to Drive 3 and then to Drive 5 For this reason the SCSI bus terminators on Drive 3 must not be enabled Only the SCSI bus terminators on Drive 5 must be enabled 12 02 History Module Service 191 9 5 4 Single Dual 875 MB Drive Pinning Continued Nonterminated 875 MB Drive 3 jumper block selections 51196680 200 Figure 9 21 Nonterminated 875 MB Drive 3 51196680 200 Jumper Block Selections Bottom View a SCSI Bus Address Jumper Block N Drive 3 AO A1 A2 HE a a a a Option Jumper Block N J6 Drive 3 Nonterminated PWB Drive c Bottom TE DS ME WP PD SS TP TP O seeseacesn A 16730 B 12 02 History Module Service 192 9 5 5 Single Dual 1 8 GB Drive Pinning Overview Single drive pinning Use Figures 9 22 and 9 23 to determine the pinning for the nonredundant 1 8 GB drive s In a nonredundant single drive configuration a single 1 8 GB drive is mounted in the front position on the tray assembly in one Winchester Drive Module Figure 9 22 illustrates the location and configuration of the jumper blocks on the 1 8 GB drive The drive must be configured for a SCSI bus address of 5 on the SCSI Bus Address J6 jumper block Also note the location of the jumpers on the Option J2 jumper block The SCSI Address J6 jumper block must have jump
44. fail the redundant partner has the full database intact and can continue to provide normal operation capability until the failed drive is repaired or replaced For more information on redundant drives go to subsection 3 6 Figure 3 2 Dual Drive TYPE I Winchester Drive Tray 6768 There are no field adjustments required for the WDA History Module s electronics or Winchester disk drives 12 02 History Module Service 42 3 2 CE Compliance Overview Description The design of the Five Slot Module chassis and the I O circuit boards that install in the rear card cage has changed for CE Compliance Pertinent information can be found in the Five Ten Slot Service manual Functionally the non CE Compliant and CE Compliant WDA History Modules are the same However the I O circuit boards that install in the rear card cages are not interchangeable because of their physical characteristics Figures 3 3 and 3 4 illustrate the front and rear views of the non CE Compliant and CE Compliant WDA History Modules that can be configured for one two or four Winchester disk drives The non CE Compliant module illustrated is the enhanced LCN Five Slot Module Besides circuit boards that control the interface to the Local Control Network K2LCN or K4LCN and the drives SPC the module also contains two slide out trays on which the Winchester disk drives are mounted The trays are installed in a Winchester Disk Asse
45. field Instead the Winchester Disk Assembly should be replaced if it is suspected that the circuit board has failed A Winchester Drive Tray 3 or 4 is installed in the assembly by gently sliding it into its compartment until it begins to mate with the WDI board Then firmly apply pressure to the front of the tray until the extractor lever assumes a relaxed position that is parallel to the tray s front panel 12 02 History Module Service 248 10 4 Winchester Drive Tray Assembly 10 4 1 General Information Introduction The item numbers identified in parentheses _ in this subsection are represented by the ballooned numbers in Figures 10 11 and 10 12 which are exploded views of the Winchester Drive Tray Figure 10 11Single Drive Winchester Drive Tray Exploded View Figure 10 12 Dual Drive Winchester Drive Tray Exploded View 6768 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 249 10 4 1 General Information continued Description Disk drive SCSI bus termination A Winchester Drive Tray consists of the following components One or two Winchester disk drives 1 or 2 A single drive tray contains one drive and a dual drive tray contains two drives A printed flex circuit 3 interconnects the drive s with the tray connector 4 that interfaces to the WDI circuit board in the Winchester Disk Assembly The printed flex circuit provides the SCSI bus interface to t
46. in Figures 10 5 and 10 6 have an LCN node address pinning module TS2 at locations 21E and 7A respectively Pin the K4LCN board for the appropriate LCN node address All jumpers on the LCN I O circuit board must be removed if the LCN address is selected on the K4LCN circuit board If a CLCN A B board is present its configuration switches must be in their zero 0 position As illustrated in Figure 10 1 slide the K2LCN or K4LCN circuit board 11 into slot 1 until it is fully mated with the backpanel connectors after selecting the appropriate LCN node address Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 239 10 2 4 Circuit Board Replacement continued K2LCN Figure 10 3 illustrates LCN node address selection on the K2LCN board 51401551 x00 LCN assembly 51401551 x00 The pinning block TS2 is located at coordinate Agdress Selecto 9C on the board The absence of a jumper is a binary 1 Parity must be an odd number Figure 10 3 K2LCN Board 51401551 x00 LCN Node Address Selection NOTE This text is not on the board Binary Weight Parity Jumper Removed 1 9467 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 240 10 2 4 Circuit Board Replacement continued K2LCN Figure 10 4 illustrates LCN node address selection on the K2LCN board 51402615 x00 LCN assembly 51402615 x00 The pinning block TS1 is loca
47. is designated Drive 5 and must be pinned for address 5 It is referred to as Device 5 Its redundant partner that is mounted in the bottom Winchester Drive Module module 1 is designated Drive 4 and must be pinned for address 4 It is referred to as Device 4 Figure 2 9 illustrates the positions and address assignments of the drives on the tray assemblies while Figures 2 10 and 2 11 illustrate the components and interconnections of a History Module with a redundant single drives Figure 2 9 Redundant Drive Physical Locations and Addresses Drive 5 Drive 5 Drive 3 Address 5 Address 5 Address 3 Drive 2 Drive 4 Drive 4 Address 2 Address 4 Address 4 Redundant Single Drives Redundant Dual Drives gi Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 35 2 3 1 Redundant Single Drive Configuration continued Redundant single WREN III drive interconnections Figure 2 10 Redundant Single WREN III Drive Components and Interconnections 51304156 100 J1 SCSI Bus Cable SCSI Bus Terminator Assembly 51304193 100 P s ower Cord 54195178 100 Located in Drive Module 2 and Connected at End of Bus Drive 5 Rear View iew pafe offo ml Winchester Drive Module 2 Top View SCSI Bus Terminators Removed from Both Drives Winchester Drive Top View Winchester Drive Module 1 SCSI Bus Cable Top View Connec
48. is mounted in the front position on the tray assembly in the lower module module 1 and has a SCSI bus address of 4 Address 4 is selected by placing a Drive Select Plug in the 2 position In binary arithmetic 2 4 decimal Be sure that the terminator resistor module is removed from both drives Bus termination is provided at the end of the SCSI bus cable by a bus terminator card for redundant single drives Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 203 9 6 1 1 Single WREN Ill Drive Pinning Continued Redundant single WREN III drive configuration Figure 9 29 Redundant Single WREN III Drive Configuration OOO 00 Set Jumpers as Shown O for Correct System O Address 21 0PTP Address 5 Remove Terminators from both Drives O O Rear View Single Drive o o Redundant Configuration D 1 0 P TP Is Two Physical Drives Address 4 16771 12 02 History Module Service 204 9 6 1 2 Single WREN Ill Drive Cabling Redundant single Figure 9 30 illustrates a side view of the cable routing for a redundant drive SCSI bus cable Single WREN III drive configuration The single SCSI bus ribbon cable rout ng from the SPC I O circuit board in the I O cage in the rear of the electronics module passes through a slotted hole in the back of the lower Winchester Drive Module and routes over the slide tray assembly to Drive 4 The cable then exits the lower Winchester Drive Module and enters
49. jumper block must have a jumper installed between pins 2 and 4 because no SCSI bus termination resistor modules should be installed e The Parity Remote Start jumper block must have a jumper installed between pins 1 and 2 to enable data parity checking e The Options jumper block should have no jumpers installed No SCSI bus termination resistor modules should be installed on either drive Bus termination is provided at the drive end of the SCSI bus cable by a bus terminator card Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 215 9 7 1 1 Single 210 MB Drive Pinning continued Nonterminated 210 MB Drive 5 jumper block selections Figure 9 38 Nonterminated 210 MB Drive 5 Jumper Block Selections Bottom View Options Jumper Block None Selected for Drives 2 5 PWB SCSI Drive Address Parity Remote Start pwB Jumper Block a PWB Jumper Block Drive 51196220 100 No Termination Ce ao Modules Se No jumpers Terminator Power DC Power Connector Jumper Block PWB 5Vdc 5 Volts Return 12 Volts Return 12 Vdc 11848 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 216 9 7 1 1 Single 210 MB Drive Pinning continued Nonterminated 210 MB Drive 4 jumper block selections Figure 9 39 Nonterminated 210 MB Drive 4 Jumper Block Selections Bottom View Options Jumper Block None Selected for Drives 2 5 PWB S
50. megabyte drive The locations of the jumper blocks on the drive are illustrated in jumper block Figure 8 15 Only the Active Passive Termination and SCSI Drive locations Address jumper blocks should be altered SCSI drive addresses of 2 3 4 and 5 are the only valid addresses Figure 10 15 445 Megabyte Drive Jumper Block Selections Bottom View Options Jumper Block t Not Used No Jumpers Drive Bottom SCSI Drive Address Jumper Block See Table Drive Bottom SCSI BusTermination Resistor Modules Active Passive Termination Jumper Block PWB Drives 4 and 5 DC Power Connector I O Connector J1 CE 5 Volts Return 12 Volts Return 12 Vdc o o o oQ o ht 12345678 O Active Passive Termination Jumper Block PWB Drives 2 and 3 we fl pooole oo 12345678 12824 fo Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 255 10 4 2 Winchester Disk Drive Replacement continued 445 megabyte drive SCSI bus termination resistor modules Three SCSI bus termination modules must be installed at the bottom of any Winchester disk drive that is mounted at the front position of the Winchester Drive Tray A drive mounted at the rear position on a tray never has termination resistor modules installed The location and orientation of the modules is illustrated in Figure 10 16 Be sure that the module orientation is correct
51. of a System Message Requesting Action Be Taken Against a Specific HM Drive For Information On Functions And Options Displayed On This Menu Position The Cursor On The Desired Target And Press HELP 6138 Sector Initialization The Sector Initialization Reassignment Menu Verification display is Reassignment Menu illustrated in Figure 5 10 Verification Figure 5 10 Sector Initialization Reassignment Menu Verification Display 23 Jul 91 21 15 47 1 SECTOR INITIALIZATION REASSIGNMENT Enter PARAMETERS ENTER Module Number 43 1 To 96 ENTER Drive Number 245 0 To 7 ENTER Sector Number 99999999 1 To 99999999 Sector Initialize Sector Reassign VERIFY THAT THE DATA ENTERED IS CORRECT YES NO WARNING Use of Function Will Permanently Reassign Sector on the Requested HM This Should Only Be Used After receipt of a System Message Requesti Action Be Taken Against a Specific HM Drive For Information On Functions And Options Displayed On This Menu Position The Cursor On The Desired Target And Press HELP 6139 12 02 History Module Service 116 Section 6 WREN Type History Module Disassembly 6 1 Overview Section contents The topics covered in this section are Topic See Page 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 3 1 6 3 2 6 3 3 6 4 6 4 1 6 4 2 6 4 3 Overview 119 Electronics
52. presented are effective down to the replacement part level A spare parts lists is included and is keyed to an exploded figure view that can be used for the disassembly and assembly procedures 1 2 Support Services and Documents Support documents Support services If you need help Honeywell support documents are either required or will be of assistance during checkout startup and operation of the system They are referenced at the beginning of this publication Optional Honeywell power on support field services and technical support are available during the on site checkout of the TPS system equipment A Honeywell Technical Assistance Center TAC engineer can often help isolate hardware failures and procedural errors Additionally TAC has ready access to Shipping Alerts Product Release Notices and problem histories that may help identify the source of a problem 12 02 History Module Service 17 12 02 History Module Service 18 Section 2 WREN Type History Module Description 2 1 Overview Section contents The topics covered in this section are Topic See Page 2 1 Overview 21 2 2 Nonredundant Drive History Modules 23 2 2 1 WREN III History Module Description 23 2 2 2 210 445 875 MB and 1 8 GB History Module Description 29 2 3 Redundant Drive History Modules 35 2 3 1 Redundant Single Disk Drive Configuration 37 2 3 2 Redundant Dual Drive Configuration 40 P
53. procedure in Table 5 17 Table 5 17 Redundant Drive Data Error Recovery Procedure Sector Known Step Action 1 Initialize the bad sector write zeros using the SMCC Sector Initialization Reassignment function covered in subsection 5 3 13 If an error occurs use the Sector Reassignment option of the SMCC Sector Initialization Reassignment function 2 Use the utility command SYNCH to synchronize the data on the problem drive with the working redundant partner Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 104 5 3 9 Redundant Drive Data Error Recovery continued Synchronization operation If the sector problem returns A SYNCH operation copies the data resident on the working primary drive to the drive that is being synchronized Only the necessary volumes and files are copied The final result provides a functional on line redundant drive with identical data as the primary drive System demands on the History Module will affect the total time for synchronization The SYNCH operation can take up to 45 minutes Any system activity which alters the contents of the working drive during the SYNCH operation will also be passed on to the drive being synchronized The successful conclusion of the synchronization operation places the synchronized drive on line with its working redundant partner If the problem with the sector in question returns it must be assumed that t
54. with drive 5 or 3 respectively Use the recovery procedure in Table 5 19 for an error condition in sectors 1 through 31 of the Control Track on drive 4 or 2 Table 5 19 Drive 4 or 2 Control Track Error Recovery Procedure Redundant Drives Step Action 1 For a Control Track error on drive 4 or 2 place the drive OFFLINE by using the appropriate Universal Station display 2 Initialize or reassign the sector containing the error 3 Synchronize drive 4 or 2 with drive 5 or 3 respectively Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 106 5 3 10 Control Track Error Recovery for Sectors 1 31 continued Nonredundant drive 5 Use the recovery procedure in Table 5 20 for an error condition in sectors or 3 has a Control 1 through 31 of the Control Track on drive 5 or 3 Track error Table 5 20 Drive 5 or 3 Control Track Error Recovery Procedure Nonredundant Drives Step Action 1 Load the HMI personality into the History Module 2 Initialize or reassign the sector containing the error 3 If sectors 1 through 7 of drive 5 have been initialized or reassigned rewrite the Boot record on the drive Autoboot the History Module twice by cycling power to the History Module Wait for an OK status between the first and second autoboot 12 02 History Module Service 107 5 3 11 Status Detail Display Accessing the Status Detail displa
55. you have access to the Winchester Drive Tray power ON OFF switch es If a Winchester Drive Tray was removed to replace a defective drive be sure the drive is properly pinned for the drive s location on the tray right hand or left hand tray If you are not sure that the front drive on a tray has three SCSI bus termination modules installed on the bottom of the drive you will have to remove the drive to verify their presence Ensure that the trays are locked in position The tray s extractor lever should be in its relaxed position which is parallel to the front of the tray Place each tray s power ON OFF switch in the ON position Check that all circuit boards are installed in their assigned module slots and properly seated Figure 3 1 3 2 6 1 and 11 1 illustrate the circuit board assignments Check that the two ribbon cables between the SPCII I O and WDI I O circuit boards are in place and secure Check to be sure that the Local Control Network LCN trunk cables are properly connected to the LCN I O CLCN A B circuit board and not cross connected Cable A yellow must be connected to the A connector and cable B green must be connected to the B connector Check that the address jumpers switches on the K2LCN K4LCN or address jumpers LCN I O CLCN A B circuit board are correct for the LCN node selection Only one of the two circuit boards must be pinned Be sure the other circuit board has no addr
56. 10 445 875 MB 51304191 100 or 1 8 GB Drive 7 SCSI Bus Ribbon Cable for dual WREN Ill 210 445 875 MB 51304192 100 or 1 8 GB Drives 7 SCSI Bus Ribbon Cable for redundant single WREN III 210 445 875 MB 51304193 100 or 1 8 GB Drives 7 SCSI Bus Ribbon Cable for redundant dual WREN III 210 445 875 MB 51304194 100 or 1 8 GB Drives ORU level replacement item Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 302 13 2 WDA type History Module parts list Table 13 2 Replaceable Parts Lists continued History Module at the service part level WDA Type Drive History Module Parts List Table 13 2 lists part numbers for the Winchester Disk Assembly type ltem Description Part Number Five Slot Module Assembly w o circuit boards power supply fan assy 51195499 100 3 Fan Assembly with fans for Five Slot Module 51400646 100 F2 Enhanced Power Supply for Five Slot Module 51195066 100 Power Cord 125 Vac for Five Slot Module 51303508 100 Power Cord 250 Vac for Five Slot Module 51303508 200 1 Five Slot Module Cover Assembly 51400918 100 4 WDA Chassis with Winchester Drive Interface WDI circuit board 51401930 100 5 6 Winchester Drive Tray power cable power switch and printed flex circuit 51401929 300 7 210 Megabyte Disk Drive kit includes installation instructions 51196269 100 445 Megabyte Disk Dr
57. 14 The SPC Input Output SPC I O circuit board 51304156 100 that interfaces WREN III drives has no pinning requirements 12 02 History Module Service 169 9 4 2 Single Dual WREN III Drive Pinning Overview Refer to Figures 9 6 and 9 7 to determine pinning for the nonredundant WREN III drive s Single drive pinning In a nonredundant single drive configuration a single WREN III drive is mounted in one Winchester Drive Module As illustrated in Figure 9 6 the single drive is designated Drive 5 and has a SCSI bus address of 5 Address 5 is selected on the drive by placing Drive Select Plugs in the 2 and 0 positions In binary arithmetic 2 2 4 1 5 decimal Be sure that a terminator resistor module is installed on the drive Jumpers must also be installed in the locations marked P Parity Checking and TP Termination Power Figure 9 6 Single WREN III Drive Configuration and Termination Nonredundant Set Jumpers as Shown for Correct System Address Rear View Single Drive Nonredundant Drive Select Jumpers Terminator OO0O000 2 1 0 Octal address on SCSI Bus O Fadfa P Parity Checking TP Termination Power O 2 1 0 P TP rem Address 5 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 170 9 4 2 Single Dual WREN III Drive Pinning Continued Dual WREN III drive In a nonredundant dual drive configuration the two WREN III driv
58. 165 250 284 WDI I O 52 73 Winchester Disk Assembly 237 252 271 286 Winchester Disk Assembly 49 71 251 285 Winchester disk drive 163 237 255 271 Winchester disk drive 268 Winchester Drive Tray 128 138 139 166 167 254 288 Winchester Drive Tray description 141 169 12 02 History Module Service 309 Index 12 02 History Module Service 310
59. 19 This test can be configured to do a complete surface Read Check and automatically add any bad sectors it encounters to the existing defect list Bad Sector List A short period approximately 10 minutes of running Subtest 14 will certify the read write capability of the drive Additional tests should be run if there is any doubt concerning the drive s functionality An alternate method of drive recovery would be to completely reformat the drive using Subtest 21 of the SCMD test under HVTS This test must be configured to add bad sectors HVTS refers to these as defective blocks to the existing defect list Bad Sector List Never run this test configured to clear the Bad Sector List This HVTS testing could reveal that the drive is defective and must be replaced Load the HMI personality and perform a drive initialization Restore to the History Module the data saved in Steps 3 and 4 Load additional volumes files from alternate sources noted in Step 3 History data that could not be saved as noted in Step 4 remains lost Load the HMO personality by performing a History Module autoboot 10 Enable the saving of Continuous History data and any other normal functions required to restore complete system operation Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 98 5 3 8 Nonredundant Drive Data Error Recovery continued ATTENTION Drive data error when the sector is known
60. 2 11 4 Winchester Drive Tray Assembly 11 4 1 General Information Introduction The item numbers identified in parentheses in this subsection are represented by the ballooned numbers in Figures 11 11 and 11 12 which are exploded views of the Winchester Drive Tray Figure 11 11 Single Drive Winchester Drive Tray Exploded View Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 283 11 4 1 General Information Continued Description Disk drive SCSI bus termination A Winchester Drive Tray consists of the following components One Winchester ST39175LW disk drive A ribbon cable 3 interconnects the drive s with the tray connector 4 that interfaces to the WDI circuit board in the Winchester Disk Assembly The ribbon cable provides the SCSI bus interface to the drive A power ON OFF switch 6 to control power from the power supply to the drive s and SCSI bus terminators on the WDI circuit board in the Winchester Disk Assembly When power is removed from the tray SCSI bus terminators are activated on the WDI circuit board in anticipation of the loss of the bus terminators installed on a Winchester disk drive in the tray that is about to be removed Terminators are installed on the drive that is mounted at the front of tray A tray power connector 7 that interfaces to the WDI circuit board in the Winchester Disk Assembly and provides 5 Vdc 12 Vdc and ground return to the drive s from th
61. 2 3 11 2 4 11 2 5 11 2 6 11 3 11 4 11 4 1 11 4 2 Overview 291 History Module Assembly 293 General Assembly 293 Fan Assembly Replacement 294 Power Supply Replacement 294 Circuit Board Replacement 295 Cabling Replacement 304 Winchester Disk Assembly Replacement 305 Winchester Disk Assembly Reassembly 306 Winchester Drive Tray Assembly 307 General Information 307 Winchester Disk Drive Replacement 309 Purpose Reference This section describes the assembly of the WDA History Module with major components that includes the circuit boards Winchester Disk Assembly Winchester disk drive s power supply fan assembly and the module cabling Refer to the Five Ten Slot Module Service manual for assembly procedures where applicable In particular the installation of the K2LCN or K4LCN circuit board and its associated I O circuit board the LCN I O CLCN A B is detailed in the Five Ten Slot Module Service manual All the other circuit boards used in the WDA History Module other than the Smart Peripheral Controller SPC circuit board are unique to the WDA History Module Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 267 11 1 Overview Continued History Module description The Winchester Disk Assembly that occupies the upper two card slot locations in the module chassis can contain two Winchester Drive Trays The trays are physically and electrically identical except for the number of
62. 2LCN 45 67 137 165 K2LCN or K4LCN 52 73 L LCN 137 165 250 284 LCN coax cables 1 37 165 node address 85 LCN I O 137 165 LOAD DUMP 04 07 108 Logical Block addresses 301 maintenance message abbreviations 9 media defects 102 modules 146 149 153 156 159 260 263 266 268 N nonredundant drive failure 701 O Object Detail Volume Status displays 97 Object Detail display 714 OFFLINE 39 167 Optimum Replaceable Unit 305 ORU 305 Overview 21 P personnel grounding strap 82 135 163 pinning 142 170 255 pinning 241 275 power supply 45 67 85 135 163 237 240 271 274 12 02 History Module Service 307 Index power supply 136 164 indicators 85 power switch 135 163 power on procedures 293 Primary Code 98 printed flex circuit 141 254 Product Release Notices 17 R Real Time Journal RTJ 97 messages 99 redundancy 35 58 77 drive synchronization 35 58 77 redundant drive configuration 20 44 66 ribbon cab le 169 ribbon cable 49 71 250 284 ribbon cable 288 S SCMD Test 21 301 SCSI bus 49 50 71 72 257 SCSI bus interface 741 169 ribbon cables 137 165 termination 49 71 termination modules 53 56 59 61 78 146 149 153 156 159 255 260 263 266 268 termination modules 142 257 termination modules must be 254 terminators 141 153 156 159 169 263 266 268 Seagate ST39175LWDrive with
63. 4 16 indicates node address 03 3 8 2 4 1 2 0 1 NOTE The software will allow only node addresses 1 64 at this time 2923 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 278 11 2 4 Circuit Board Replacement continued CLCN A B board LCN The CLCN A B board is the CE Compliant version of the LCN I O board node address selection Figure 11 8 illustrates LCN node address selection on the CLCN A B board The figure illustrates an LCN node address of seven 7 Placing a switch in the zero 0 position is a binary 1 Parity must be an odd number Slide the board into the slot until it is fully mated with the backpanel connectors after configuring the board for the appropriate LCN node address Figure 11 8 CLCN A B Board LCN Node Address Selection P C ASSY NO 51305072 100 o REV A 6 Q 8 5 oc lt 4 3 2 1 0 LCN Address 16749 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 279 11 2 4 Circuit Board Replacement Continued WDI I O circuit board The WDI I O circuit board 9 is associated with the Winchester Drive Interface WDD circuit board located in the Winchester Disk Assembly 4 and is installed in slot 5 of the rear card cage as illustrated in Figure 11 1 There are no pinning requirements on the circuit board Slide the board into the slot until it is fully mated with the backpanel connectors 11 2 5 Cabling Replacement Overview W
64. 4 Circuit Board Replacement ccccccccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseereeseaeeesnaeeseeeseaees 271 11 2 5 Cabling Replacement ccccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeaeeeeaeeceeeeeseaeeesaeeeeneeenaees 280 11 2 6 Winchester Disk Assembly Replacement cecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 281 11 3 Winchester Disk Assembly Reassembly cceeceeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 282 11 4 Winchester Drive Tray Assembly eecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeteeeaeeeeeeeaees 283 11 4 1 General INformation ccccccceceeeeeeeceeneeceeeeeceaeeeeaaeseeaeeseeeeeseaeeeseaeeseaeeseaes 283 11 4 2 Winchester Disk Drive ReplaceMent cceecceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeteeeeees 285 SECTION 1 2 START UP icc cccccssceeessscdeccetecceeesaeees sescectecercucbescedsencesteteeesecdieescraseteesoncceecde 287 12 1 OVEIVICW vece cheat E EA 287 12 2 Visual GHEGCKS se E r A E A E TATE 287 12 2 1 WREN Type History MOdUuIe ccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeneaees 287 12 2 2 WDA Type History Module saasseseesssesessrnessrnessrnesnnnnesnnnnesnnnnnsnnnnesnnnnennnn 288 12 3 Power on Procedure naea innn aana ERa ANEN r TEE ARE Taa 289 12 3 1 Component Replacement Startup ccccccececseeceeseeceeeeeseeeeeneeeseeessaees 290 12 3 2 Nonredundant Drive Replacement Startup cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeseeteeeees 292 12 3 3 Redundant Drive Replacement Startup c ccccceeesceceeeeeseeeeesseeeeeeeeees 294
65. 4 and 03 after the HMI personality has been run 12 02 History Module Service 112 5 3 13 Sector Initialization Reassignment Procedure for Type Drives Overview The Sector Initialization Reassignment procedure is useful when a nonrecoverable data error has occurred and the sector number has been reported The sector number can be obtained from the Real Time Journal RTJ a System Status Journal error message or from a Status Detail message as detailed in subsection 5 3 11 RTJ nonrecoverable An example of a nonrecoverable error message in the RTJ is shown error message below 13 40 36 NODE 11 INFORM DISK_DRIVE 5 OK gt WARNING NON RECOV DATA ERROR SECTOR 00049408 201 gt BB000000 CM The error message provides information that can be helpful in troubleshooting Interpreting the message provides the following information e The drive numbers e The bad sector number 00049408 e The volume name 1201 e The file name BBO000000 CM The drive number and the bad sector number are required in the Sector Initialization Reassignment procedure that follows Initialize reassign Use the procedure in Table 5 24 to perform the sector initialization or sector procedure reassignment function Refer also to Figures 5 7 through 5 10 DEGRADED or The History Module status must be DEGRADED or CORRUPTED to perform an CORRUPTED status on line Sector Initialization Reassignment procedure
66. 5 8 to find the source of the reported error within the History Module Note that there are very few errors which can be attributed to the drive itself If a software error or controller error is indicated look for corrupted software or a failed SPC or SPC I O circuit board Table 5 8 Drive Primary and Secondary Error Codes Primary Code Secondary Code Error Source 0 n a Software error 1 n a Software error 2 n a Software error 1 n a Software error 2 n a Software error 3 n a Software error 4 n a Controller error 5 0 Controller error 5 1 Controller error 5 2 Controller error 5 3 Controller error 5 4 Controller error 5 5 Software error 5 6 Software error 5 7 Software error 5 8 Controller error 5 9 Controller error 5 10 Controller error 5 11 Disk drive error with status 5 12 Disk drive interface error 6 n a Not used 7 n a Disk drive failure removal Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 89 5 3 4 SMCC Detailed Module Error Messages Continued Primary and Secondary Error Codes continued Table 5 8 Drive Primary and Secondary Error Codes Continued Primary Code Secondary Code Error Source 8 n a Not used 9 n a Not used 10 n a Not used 11 n a Not used Sense Key and Sense Code Use the drive Sense Key Sense Codes listed in Ta
67. A WARNING status is not acceptable because it may be the result of a data error while trying to read a bad sector Off line procedure If the Initialization Reassignment procedure is not successful on line try loading the History Module with the off line Initialization personality HMI and performing the Initialization Reassignment procedure Autoboot the History Module and do a SYNCH operation Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 113 5 3 13 Sector Initialization Reassignment Procedure continued Procedure Output status messages Table 5 24 Initialize Reassign Sector Procedure Step Action 1 Choose the Engineering Personality Main Menu See Figure 5 7 2 Select the SMCC MAINTENANCE target This produces the SMCC Main Menu as illustrated in Figure 5 8 On the SMCC Main Menu display as illustrated in Figure 5 8 select the SECTOR INIT REASSIGN target This will cause the Sector Initialization Reassignment display to appear See Figure 5 9 Enter the information requested Module Number This is the node number of the History Module with the defective drive Drive Number From the RTJ System Status Journal or Status Detail display Sector Number From the RTJ or System Status Journal or Status Detail display lor R Enter I to initialize or R to reassign the sector After you have entered the information press the ENTER key This produces the verification scre
68. Address Remote J6 jumper block must have no jumpers installed on it In the nonredundant dual drive configuration the SCSI bus cable from the SPC I O circuit board connects first to Drive 3 and then to Drive 5 For this reason the SCSI bus terminators on Drive 3 must not be enabled Only the SCSI bus terminators on Drive 5 must be enabled Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 190 9 5 4 Single Dual 875 MB Drive Pinning continued Nonterminated 875 MB Drive 3 jumper block selections 51196680 100 Figure 9 20 Nonterminated 875 MB Drive 3 51196680 100 Jumper Block Selections Bottom View SCSI Address Remote Jumper Block SCSI Drive Address Not Used No Jumpers Jumper Block l Ji J5 i 5 a Drive PWB 321 Bottom J Sy J1 Bottom Option Select Jumper Block PWB J2 ecoeoie ee A 5 Volts Return ee0eene oo ot A 12 Volts Return 12345678 12 Vdc 54027 875 MB Drive 3 Figure 9 21 illustrates the location and configuration of the jumper blocks 51196680 200 on Drive 3 51196680 200 The drive must be configured for a SCSI bus address of 3 on the SCSI Bus Address J6 jumper block Also note the absence of the jumpers on the Option J2 jumper block The SCSI Address J5 jumper block must have jumpers installed in positions AO and A1 for correct addressing The Option Select J2 jumper block must have no jumpers installed on it In the nonredundant dual
69. Address Selection Device Tray SCSI Device Address Jumper Position Location Left Hand Rear 2 2 Right Hand Rear 3 1 and 2 Left Hand Front 4 3 Right Hand Front 5 1 and 3 Replacement drives are shipped from the factory pinned for a SCSI device address of 5 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 138 7 3 1 Winchester Disk Drive Removal continued 445 megabyte drive The locations of the jumper blocks on the drive are illustrated in Figure 7 eee block 6 Only the Active Passive Termination and SCSI Drive Address jumper peations blocks should be altered SCSI drive addresses of 2 3 4 and 5 are the only valid addresses Figure 7 6 445 Megabyte Drive Jumper Block Selections Bottom View Options Jumper Block t Not Used No Jumpers Drive Bottom SCSI Drive Address Jumper Block J1 See Table Drive SCSI BusTermination Resistor Modules Active Passive Termination Jumper Block PWB Drives 4 and 5 DC Power Connector 1 O Connector J1 A 5vdc 5 Volts Return 12 Volts Return 12 Vdc o o opo gg 12345678 0 Active Passive Termination Jumper Block PWB Drives 2 and 3 D eeeootleee eeooeoogees 12345678 fo 12824 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 139 7 3 1 Winchester Disk Drive Removal continued 445 megabyte drive SCSI bus termination resistor
70. Bus Ribbon Drive 5 Cable Electronics Module SPC I O Connector SIDE VIEW 16767 12 02 History Module Service 174 9 5 Nonredundant 210 445 875 MB and 1 8 GB Drive Installation Overview Use the supplementary information in this section when installing either the 210 megabyte 445 megabyte 875 megabyte or 1 8 gigabyte drive and associated components With the exception of drive pinning instructions the installation of either type of drive is identical 12 02 History Module Service 175 9 5 1 Smart Peripheral Controller SPC and SPC I O Boards SPC pinning SPC firmware revision No SPC I O pinning required Check the pinning jumpers at location TS1 on the Smart Peripheral Controller circuit board 51401052 100 and verify they are positioned as illustrated in Figure 9 11 The revision pinning at TS2 is factory set and must not be altered in the field Inspect the Smart Peripheral Controller circuit board and verify that it has the proper firmware revision It must be revision G or a later revision The two firmware EPROMs are located approximately at coordinates 18F and 18G as illustrated in Figure 9 11 If replacement of the firmware is required note the orientation and location of the EPROMs 0928 101 and 0928 102 before removal Be sure to wear an ESD wriststrap that is properly grounded Remove the EPROMs and replace them with the proper revision Change the firmware revisio
71. C Initialize Reassign Sector function initialize the drive reload the entire drive and resume operation 3 Remove and replace the drive initialize the new drive and restore all data 4 Use HVTS off line and attempt to recover the drive 5 Ifa quick fix procedure is to be used you must determine whether or not drive initialization and full reload will be required The drive must be initialized and fully reloaded if one of the following situations is true The status of the affected volume is CORRUPTED on the Volume Status display Refer to subsection 5 3 12 The bad file is in one of the following volumes Maintenance System software Journals Continuous History data except CM files assuming backup copy Checkpoint files Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 99 5 3 8 Nonredundant Drive Data Error Recovery continued Two quick fix Two quick fix procedures are available They are described below If one procedures of the above situations is true you must use the procedure that incorporates initialization and reload of the disk If the status of the affected volume is DEGRADED on the Volume Status display and the file is not in one of the volumes indicated above you can use the procedure that does not incorporate initialization and reloading the drive Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 100 5 3 8 Nonredundant Drive Data Error Recovery continued Quick fix procedure
72. CSI Drive Address Parity Remote Start pwB Jumper Block a PWB Jumper Block Drive DC Power Connector Terminator Power Jumper Block A B 4 PWB PWB 5Vdc 5 Volts Return 12 Volts Return 12 Vdc No jumpers f 11849 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 217 9 7 1 2 Single 445 MB Drive Pinning Overview Single 445 MB drive pinning Drive 5 Drive 4 SCSI bus termination resistor modules Redundant single drive configuration is similar in appearance to the nonredundant dual drive configuration The differences are in address pinning SCSI bus termination and cabling Each drive is housed in a separate Winchester Drive Module The configuration of a History Module with redundant single 445 megabyte drives is illustrated in Figure 9 37 The drives are located in the front positions on the tray assembly in both drive chassis and must be pinned as drive 5 upper drive chassis and drive 4 lower drive chassis as illustrated in Figures 9 40 and Figure 9 41 respectively Note the positions of the configuration jumpers on the drives If necessary reposition the pinning e The SCSI Drive Address jumper block must have jumpers installed in positions 1 and 3 for correct addressing e The Active Passive Termination jumper block must have a jumper installed in position 5 to enable data parity checking No SCSI bus termination resistor modules should be ins
73. CSI bus through two printed flex circuits to the Winchester disk drive s mounted on the Winchester Drive Tray s as illustrated in Figure 3 5 The bus splits on the WDI I O circuit board providing the bus interface to each Winchester Drive Tray The Smart Peripheral Controller SPC circuit board interconnects by the SCSI bus ribbon cable and printed flex circuit with one or two drives on each tray present The SCSI bus is terminated by termination modules installed on the last end drive When a tray has one Winchester disk drive mounted on it the drive is mounted in the front position and must have three bus termination modules installed on the drive if it is a 210 megabyte or 445 megabyte drive The 875 megabyte and 1 8 gigabyte drives do not have bus termination modules Instead internal bus terminators are enabled electronically on the drive by jumper block selection If a second Winchester disk drive is present on the tray the second drive is mounted in the rear position on the tray without SCSI bus termination modules installed on it as illustrated in Figure 3 5 The WDI circuit board resident in the Winchester Disk Assembly has two sets of SCSI bus resistor terminators one set for each tray The set of terminators is activated when power is removed from the individual Winchester Drive Tray by a power switch at the front of the tray This arrangement allows a failed drive on a tray to be removed and replaced without distur
74. Drive Module with power supply is used to house each drive when a second drive can be accommodated in a single Winchester Drive Module If data is being written to a drive at the same instant that AC power fails there must be a way to provide power to the drive until it has had time to complete the write cycle and avoid corrupted data The Winchester Disk Drive power supply is designed with sufficient ride through power to sustain power for a single drive but not enough capability for two drives For this reason a single power supply is allocated for each drive that must record unduplicated data Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 31 2 2 2 210 445 875 MB and 1 8 GB History Module Description Continued Dual drive interconnections Figure 2 8 Dual Drive HM Components and Interconnections 5 Slot Module HM 5 Slot Module HM SPC 51401052 100 SPC I O LCN 51400667 100 2 HMPU 51400978 100 1 LCN I O Power Supply Front View Front Panel Omitted Rear View SPC I O 51304156 100 LCN I O yf 107403 100 J C ay g Red Line 4 E 51190728 105 51190728 105 i Drive Power Supply Fan Assembly Cable 51303549 100 Power Cord Ess SCSI Bus Ribbon Cable al ae ae we 51304192 100 Fan Assembly Drive 3 Rear View foooo Lower Winchester Dr
75. ED DISK 5 4 UNINITD NONE 43 FIXED DISK 4 9 OK NONE The second display example of the status shows drive 5 as UNINITD meaning not initialized Both drive status require that you execute the synchronization command Execute a data synchronization request for the OFFLINE or UNINITD drive s SYNCH PN XX XX is the physical node The response Synchronization was Initiated should then be displayed Synchronization takes at least 10 minutes If another drive is also OFFLINE or in the UNINITD state you can immediately issue the SYNCH request again for the other drive If you do another status request Step 2 you will receive a printout similar to the example for physical LCN node 43 as shown in Step 2 SYN_IP shows that synchronization is in progress The printout is not periodically updated and must be displayed to check the progress of the synchronization However the History Module status on the System Status display is updated and changes from DISKPROB to OK when the synchronization has been successfully completed Other status codes that you may see are INITIALIZED The device has been initialized NOT CREATED The drive has not been formatted CORRUPTED Formatting was unsuccessful 12 02 History Module Service 295 12 5 Winchester Disk Drive Formatting Overview All Winchester disk drives WREN III 210 MB 445 MB 875 MB and 1 8 GB in the History Module are formatted at the factory
76. Fan Assembly Removal cccccceceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseneeeeeseneaeeeenneaeees 6 3 2 Slide Tray Assembly Removal c csccceecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeaeeneeeeee 6 3 3 Power Supply Disk Drive Removal cccceceeseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeaeeteneeeeaes 6 4 Redundant Winchester Drive Module Disassembly 6 4 1 Fan Assembly Removal cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeseneaeeeeeneaeees 6 4 2 Slide Tray Assembly Removal cccsccceecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeeeaeeneeeeee 6 4 3 Power Supply Disk Drive Removal ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeteneeeeaes SECTION 7 WDA TYPE HISTORY MODULE DISASSEMBLY c seccsseeeeeeees 7 1 OVEIVICW Es a aeae idee ane hi enh Sint I A 7 2 History Module Disassembly ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaes 7 2 1 General Disassembly eccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeaeeeeaeeseeeeeseaeeesaeeneeeeee 7 2 2 Fan Assembly Removal cccceeseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeneeees 7 2 3 Power Supply Removal ccccccceeceeeeeceeeeeseeeeeeaeseeeeeseeeesaeeseaeeseeeeeaes 7 2 4 Circuit Board Removal ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaaeseeeeeseaeeesaeeeeneeees 7 2 5 Winchester Disk Assembly Removal cceeseeceeeeeeeeeeeettteeeeeeteeeeneaa 7 3 Winchester Drive Tray Disassembly eeecceeeeseeeeeeneeeeseenaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaas 7 3 1 Winchester Disk Drive Removal
77. Honeywell History Module Service HM13 501 Tetal Plant Honeywell LCN Service 2 History Module Service HM13 501 Release 530 CE Compliant Tetal Plant Copyright Notices and Trademarks Copyright 1995 2002 by Honeywell Revision 08 December 2002 While this information is presented in good faith and believed to be accurate Honeywell disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose and makes no express warranties except as may be stated in its written agreement with and for its customer In no event is Honeywell liable to anyone for any indirect special or consequential damages The information and specifications in this document are subject to change without notice TotalPlant and TDC 3000 are U S registered trademarks of Honeywell Inc Honeywell International Industry Solutions 16404 N Black Canyon Highway Phoenix AZ 85053 1 800 343 0228 12 02 History Module Service ii About This Publication This publication provides instructions for use by the maintenance personnel to service a WREN III type History Module a WREN III type History Module that has been upgraded with the 210 megabyte MB 445 megabyte MB 875 megabyte MB 1 8 gigabyte GB Winchester disk drive s or a WDA type History Module that contains either the 210 megabyte 445 megabyte 875 megabyte 1 8 gigabyte GB dual logical 875 MB or dual logical 1 8 GB Wincheste
78. However you may be required to reformat a disk drive if it develops additional bad sectors Bad sector detection The History Module is designed to detect bad sectors on its drive s You must manually allocate them to the Bad Sector Table so that they cannot be used When bad sector allocation is required use the procedure in subsections 12 5 1 or 12 5 2 WARNING ALL DATA ON THE DISK S WILL BE DESTROYED 12 02 History Module Service 296 12 5 1 Drive Formatting Procedure Smart Controller Magnetic Disk tests CAUTION When reformatting an 875 megabyte drive 51196680 200 or 1 8 gigabyte drive 51196895 100 you must use a 10 8 or later release of HVTS To reformat a drive use the off line Smart Controller Magnetic Disk SCMD tests described in the Hardware Verification Test System manual and referenced in the following discussion Consult the reference for the detailed instructions required to run the test SCMD Test 21 When properly configured HVTS SCMD Test 21 will test the drive and overview print a list of defective Logical Block addresses before and after the test runs If additional bad sectors are found they will be identified and the blocks associated with them will be automatically reassigned SCMD Test 21 Use the procedure in Table 12 8 to ran HVTS SCMD Test 21 procedure Table 12 8 HVTS SCMD Test 21 Procedure Step Action 1 To load the disk formatting software
79. I Drive History Module Components and Interconnections24 Dual WREN III Drive History Module Components and Interconnections 26 Dual 210 445 875 MB or 1 8 GB Drive History Module 0 eecees 27 210 445 875 MB or 1 8 GB Drive Positioning ccceeeteeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 29 Single 210 445 875 MB or 1 8 GB Drive History Module Components 30 Dual Drive HM Components and Interconnections ccccseeeeeeesteeeeeees 32 Redundant Drive Physical Locations and Addresses ceeeeeeeeee 35 Redundant Single WREN III Drive Components and Interconnections 36 Redundant Single 210 445 875 MB or 1 8 GB Drive Components 37 Redundant Dual WREN III Drive Components and Interconnections 39 Redundant Dual 210 445 875 MB or 1 8 GB Drive Components 40 Single Drive TYPE Winchester Drive Tray esseere 41 Dual Drive TYPE Winchester Drive Tray eeeeeeeeeeresrerenrrnnn 42 WDA History Module Non CE Compliant ccccccceeeceeceeeeeseeeeeneee 44 WDA History Module CE Compliant 0 cccccesceceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeenaeeeeeeeees 45 WDA History Module Block Diagram ccceeesneeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeneaaes 46 SCSI Bus and Termination Interconnections cccceeeeeeeeseeeeeteeeeeeeeees 48 Nonredundant Single Drive Configuration ccceeeeeseeeeeeteeeeeneeeeees 50 Nonredundant Single Drive Interconnections ccccceeeeeee
80. III Drive Pinning Dual drive pinning Be sure that the terminator resistor module is removed from all drives As illustrated in Figures 9 34 and 9 35 Drive 5 is mounted at the front position in the upper module module 2 and has a SCSI bus address of 5 Address 5 is selected by placing Drive Select Plugs in the 2 and 0 positions In binary arithmetic 2 20 4 1 5 decimal Drive 5 s redundant partner Drive 4 is mounted at the front position in the lower module module 1 and has a SCSI bus address of 4 Address 4 is selected by placing a Drive Select Plug in the 2 position In binary arithmetic 2 4 decimal In a similar manner Drive 3 is mounted at the rear position in the upper module and has a SCSI bus address of 3 Address 3 is selected by placing Drive Select Plugs in the 1 and 0 positions In binary arithmetic 2 4 2 9 2 1 3 decimal Drive 3 s redundant partner Drive 2 is mounted at the rear position in the lower module and has a SCSI address of 2 Address 2 is selected by placing a Drive Select Plug in the 1 position In binary arithmetic 2 2 decimal SCSI bus termination is provided at the drive end of the cable by a bus terminator card for the redundant dual WREN III drives Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 209 9 6 2 1 Dual WREN III Drive Pinning Continued Redundant dual WREN Ill drive configuration Figure 9 34 Redundant Du
81. Module Disassembly 120 Nonredundant Winchester Drive Module Disassembly 121 Fan Assembly Removal 122 Slide Tray Assembly Removal 122 Power Supply Disk Drive Removal 123 Redundant Winchester Drive Module Disassembly 124 Fan Assembly Removal 125 Slide Tray Assembly Removal 125 Power Supply Disk Drive Removal 126 CAUTION Purpose WARNING Before disassembly CAUTION Risk of electric shock This section describes disassembly of the major components of the History Module including removal of the electronics boards Winchester disk drive s power supply fan assembly and disconnection of the module cabling WARNING Do not attempt any disassembly or repair the History Module without first conducting orderly testing and troubleshooting procedures Return to Section 4 if you do not have a clear understanding of which part in the History Module has failed YOU MUST OBTAIN OPERATOR PERMISSION BEFORE PLACING THE HISTORY MODULE OFF LINE FOR TESTING Disassemble the major components of the History Module only to the extent necessary to repair or replace a defective part For a nonredundant drive system always use the Universal Station to select the failed node from the History Module Status display and perform a SHUTDOWN command For a redundant drive system place the drive s off line in the Winchester Drive Module to be repaired Allow at least a 30 second drive spin down time before attempting to rem
82. Power Cable 51303536 061 Winchester Drive Chassis Top View Note Depending upon the manufacturing date of the History Module an EMPU HMPU or HPK2 could be installed in slot 1 If an HPK2 is installed in slot 1 the SPC and SPC I O circuit boards must be installed in slot 4 because no more than than two empty slots can exist between circuit boards 16780 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 30 2 2 2 210 445 875 MB and 1 8 GB History Module Description Continued Dual drive configuration In a History Module with dual drives the drive mounted in the front position in the bottom Winchester Drive Module module 1 is designated Drive 3 and must be pinned for SCSI bus address 3 It is referred to as Device 3 The drive that is mounted in the top Winchester module module 2 is designated Drive 5 pinned for address 5 and referred to as Device 5 Figure 2 8 illustrates the positions and addresses of the drives on the tray assemblies Figure 2 8 illustrates the components and interconnections between the SPC I O circuit board and the dual drives Three SCSI bus termination resistor modules must be installed on the bottom of the drive that is at the end of the SCSI bus ribbon cable Device 5 The drive that is located in the middle of the SCSI bus Device 3 must have no SCSI bus termination resistor modules installed on it It may appear excessive that a separate Winchester
83. S THE RESET SWITCH ON THE HISTORY MODULE POWER SUPPLY WHEN A HISTORY MODULE PERSONALITY IS ACTIVE If a write to a drive is in process the reset will prevent software from finishing the write and leave corrupted data on the drive The proper reset procedure is in Table 5 1 Table 5 1 History Module Reset Procedure Step Action 1 Do a node shutdown from the Universal Station Remove power from the module with the power supply power switch 2 3 Wait 30 seconds and then reapply power to the History Module 4 Press the reset button once to abort the normal autoboot which is needed only during a History Module initialization procedure When reformatting an 875 megabyte drive 51196680 200 or 1 8 gigabyte drive 51196895 100 you must use a 11 5 or later release of HVTS CAUTION OBSERVE ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ESD PROCEDURES All assemblies used in the History Module contain electrostatically sensitive devices Use a personnel grounding strap and grounded work surface Store and transport parts in electrostatically safe containers Consider a strategy before attempting the repair of the History Module How is it used in your system Is it a system local or area History Module If the data in your system History Module is not used or updated often you can autoboot it with little impact on the process The loss of a local History Module containing schematics for the process can be more severe How
84. SCSI Bus Ribbon Cable 51304194 100 Fan Assembly er Drive 2 Rear View 000 Drive 4 Rear View etree years DC Power Cable 51303536 04 nin Drive Power Supply Fan Assembly Cable Fan Assembly Drive 3 Rear View rive Rear View Upper Winchester Drive Chassis Top View Note DC Power Cable 51303536 061 Depending upon the manufacturing date of the History Module an EMPU HMPU or HPK2 could be installed in slot 1 If an HPK2 is installed in slot 1 slot 4 because no more than than two empty slots the SPC and SPC I O circuit boards must be installe can exist between circuit boards 11859 12 02 History Module Service 40 Section 3 WDA Type History Module with Type I Drive 3 1 Overview Section contents The topics covered in this section are Topic See Page 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 5 1 3 5 2 3 6 3 6 1 3 6 2 3 7 Overview 43 Description 45 Physical Configuration 49 Circuit Board Configuration 51 Nonredundant Drive History Module Configuration 52 Single Disk Drive Configuration 52 Dual Disk Drives Configuration 54 Redundant Drives History Module Configuration 56 Single Disk Drive Configuration 57 Dual Disk Drives Configuration 59 Field Adjustments 61 Purpose of the section Purpose of the WDA type History Module This section describes the four possible configurations for the WDA Ty
85. SCSI drive addresses of 2 3 4 and 5 are the only valid addresses Figure 7 9 875 Megabyte Drive 51196680 200 Jumper Block Selections Bottom View Option Jumper Block Drives 4 and 5 PWB SCSI Bus Address Jumper Block See Address Selection Table A0 A1 A2 e J2 Drive Bottom Option Jumper Block Drives 2 and 3 4 PWB TE DSME WP PD SS TP TP DC Power Connector I O Connector J1 5 Volts Return 12 Volts Return 12 Vdc 16725 B Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 145 7 3 1 Winchester Disk Drive Removal continued 875 megabyte drive 51196680 200 SCSI bus termination Unlike the 210 and 445 megabyte drives the 875 megabyte drive 51196680 200 does not accommodate external SCSI bus termination modules on the bottom of the drive Bus terminators are permanently located on the drive s PWB and activated by jumpers on the Option J2 jumper block as illustrated in Figure 7 9 The SCSI bus terminators must be enabled on any drive that is mounted in the front position of the Winchester Drive Tray A drive mounted in the rear position on a tray must never have its bus terminators enabled The modules provide end termination for the SCSI bus when the Winchester Drive Tray is present With the tray removed resistor terminators on the Winchester Drive Interface WDD circuit board in the Winchester Dive Assembly provide the b
86. Smart Peripheral Controller I O SPCII SPC2 circuit board located at the rear of the Smart Peripheral Controller SPC circuit board slot 2 to the Winchester Drive Interface I O WDI I O WDI circuit board located at the rear of the Winchester Disk Assembly slot 5 The Winchester Disk Interface WDD circuit board located in the Winchester Disk Assembly WDA extends the SCSI bus to the Winchester disk drive s mounted on the Winchester Drive Tray s as illustrated in Figure 4 4 The Smart Peripheral Controller SPC circuit board interconnects by the SCSI bus ribbon cable to one drive on each tray present The SCSI bus is terminated by a termination module installed on the end of the ribbon cable The SCSI cable for each tray is terminated by a terminator mounted on the end of the SCSI cable that connects to the disk drive The WDI circuit board resident in the Winchester Disk Assembly has two sets of SCSI bus resistor terminators one set for each end of the bus The set of terminators is activated when power is removed from the individual Winchester Drive Tray by a power switch at the front of the tray This arrangement allows a failed drive on a tray to be removed and replaced without disturbing its redundant partner that is mounted on another tray interfacing the same SCSI bus Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 67 4 3 SCSI bus Physical Configuration continued The SCSI bus ribbon
87. T_IN_USE if the drive address is not used or you do not want to access it DEVICE_0 NOT_IN_USE A nonredundant single drive is DEVICE_5 DEVICE_1 NOT_IN_USE SCSI address 5 DEVICE_2 Nonredundant dual drives are devices 5 and 3 DEVICE_3 Redundant single drives are devices 5 and 4 DEVICE_4 Redundant dual drives are devices 5 4 3 and 2 DEVICE_5 Identify the device s you want to format you can D D Pa Ga ENTRY Not applicable press ENTER TESTS 21 Test 21 only ERROR_LIMIT 5 Report after the fifth error PASS_LIMIT 1 One pass through the test INHIBIT Not applicable press ENTER INUTES_LIMIT Unlimited test time ABBREVIATION 4 Provide test help information Function Parameters LIMIT_TESTING_TO_READ_ONLY NO AVOID_WRITING_TO_RESERVED_DISK NO AREA CLEAR_DEFECT_LIST NO DISPLAY_DEFECT_LIST BOTH ASTER_CONTROLLER_NODE_NUMBER 0 ENABLE FORMAT REASSIGN_DEFECTIVE_BLOCKS DISABLE ANUAL_INTERVENTION_TESTS ESET_SCSI_BUS ONTROLLERTOCONTROLLER ESTING UTILITY _HELP M R C T Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 298 12 5 1 Drive Formatting Procedure continued SCMD Test 21 parameters continued Table 12 9 SCMD T
88. This process is called data synchronization If a drive fails software ignores the failed drive and continues to operate with the good redundant partner If the failure occurs during a data operation on the primary drive the operation is completed using the redundant secondary drive The System Real Time Journal receives an entry identifying the specific sector and volume file name affected Redundancy is designed into the hardware so that a service technician can remove the Winchester Drive Tray that contains the failed drive without disturbing or removing power from its good partner mounted on another tray After the defective drive has been repaired or replaced the tray is reinstalled and the technician performs a data synchronization procedure that copies the data stored on the good backup drive to the repaired or replaced drive Redundancy operation is then restored With the introduction of this drive bad sector re assignment will be automatic and will be reported to system software 12 02 History Module Service 73 4 6 1 Type ll Disk Drives Configuration Overview Mounting and pinning The drive mounted on the right hand primary Winchester Drive Tray is the drives labeled Drive 5 in Figure 4 11 and must be pinned configured for SCSI bus address 5 The redundant partner mounted at the front on the left hand secondary Winchester Drive Tray is labeled Drive 4 and
89. WB SCSI Drive Address Parity Remote Start pwp Jumper Block a PWB Jumper Block 2 4 6 See 1 Ground Terminating Resistor Modules cs SS Za oG I O Connector T peter DC Power Connector erminator Power Drives 2 5 Jumper Block lt OOO me 5Vdc 5 Volts Return 12 Volts Return 12 Vdc 6763 3 1 Drives E 2 and 3 4 2 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 252 10 4 2 Winchester Disk Drive Replacement continued 210 megabyte drive SCSI bus termination resistor modules Three resistor SCSI bus termination modules must be installed at the bottom of any Winchester disk drive that is mounted at the front position of the Winchester Drive Tray A drive mounted at the rear position on a tray never has termination modules installed The location and orientation of the termination modules is illustrated in Figure 10 14 Be sure that the module orientation is correct The dot on the module that identifies pin 1 and or the part number must be visible It is possible to reverse the orientation of the modules The modules provide end termination for the SCSI bus when the Winchester Drive Tray is present With the tray removed resistor terminators on the Winchester Drive Interface WDD circuit board in the Winchester Drive Assembly provide the bus termination Figure 10 14Bottom View of 210 MB Drive with SCSI Bus Terminators Pin 1 D
90. a redundant drive has been replaced the data on the disk must be restored with data from its redundant partner by a synchronization process That is the drive must be structured by software to contain exactly the same data as its redundant partner which has remained functional while the drive was being replaced Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 294 12 4 Redundant Disk Drive Data Synchronization continued Data synchronization To synchronize the drives perform the following steps in Table 12 7 Table 12 7 Redundant Drives Data Synchronization Procedure Step Action 1 At a US use the Engineering Personality Main Menu display to select the SYSTEM STATUS target and examine the status of the HM you have serviced The status should be SEVERE This is a system indication that data synchronization has not been performed Select the Command Processor and issue a status request for the physical drive that you have replaced as follows STA PN XX XX is the physical node number of the target HM Examples of a printout for physical node 43 are as follows Device Redundant Node Peripheral Address Device Status System Name 43 FIXED DISK 5 4 OFFLINE NONE 43 FIXED DISK 4 5 OK NONE The first display example of the status shows drive 5 as OFFLINE Drive 4 is OK it is operational More than one drive can be OFFLINE Device Redundant Node Peripheral Address Device Status System Name 43 FIX
91. a single module and has a SCSI bus address of 3 Also note the location of the jumpers on the Option Select J2 jumper block Figure 9 23 illustrates the location and configuration of the jumper blocks on Drive 3 The SCSI Address J6 jumper block must have jumpers installed in positions 1 and 2 for correct addressing The Option Select J2 jumper block must have no jumpers installed on it In the nonredundant dual drive configuration the SCSI bus cable from the SPC I O circuit board connects first to Drive 3 and then to Drive 5 For this reason the SCSI bus terminators on Drive 3 must not be enabled Only the SCSI bus terminators on Drive 5 must be enabled Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 195 9 5 5 Single Dual 1 8 GB Drive Pinning Continued Nonterminated 1 8 GB Drive 3 jumper block selections Figure 9 23 Nonterminated 1 8 GB Drive 3 Jumper Block Selections Bottom View r SCSI Bus Address Jumper Block N Drive 3 Fa Option Jumper Block Drive 3 Nonterminated PWB Ook DS ME WP PD SS TP c eeeaeaeaeaen a i 16730 B 12 02 History Module Service 196 9 5 6 Single Dual 210 445 875 MB or 1 8 GB Drive Cabling Overview Ribbon cable red stripe positioning Avoid the fan blades Single drive cabling The single SCSI bus ribbon cable from the SPC I O circuit board in the card
92. acement Continued WDI I O circuit board The WDI I O circuit board 9 is associated with the Winchester Drive Interface WDD circuit board located in the Winchester Disk Assembly 4 and is installed in slot 5 of the rear card cage as illustrated in Figure 10 1 There are no pinning requirements on the circuit board Slide the board into the slot until it is fully mated with the backpanel connectors 10 2 5 Cabling Replacement Overview Winchester drive interface Local Control Network interface The History Module requires the connection of two external cable sets to service its two interfaces The interfaces are described below An interface between the SPCII SPC2 I O circuit board 8 located in slot 2 of the History Module s rear card cage and the WDI I O circuit board 9 located in slot 5 of the rear card cage is provided by two 50 pin ribbon cables 10 The interface is the SCSI bus interface between the SPC circuit board 12 and any Winchester disk drives mounted on the Winchester Drive Trays 5 and 6 in the Winchester Disk Assembly The sets of ribbon cable connectors are keyed and friction mate with connectors on the SPCII SPC2 I O and WDI I O circuit boards as illustrated in Figure 10 1 Do not grasp the ribbon cable when making the connection Grasp only the ribbon cable connectors Two coaxial trunk cables A and B provide the interface to the Local Control Network LCN The trunk cabl
93. acement continued 1 8 gigabyte drive SCSI bus termination Winchester disk drive installation Unlike the 210 MB and 445 megabyte drives the 1 8 gigabyte drive does not accommodate external SCSI bus termination modules on the bottom of the drive Bus terminators are permanently located on the drive s PWB and activated by jumpers on the Option Select J2 jumper block as illustrated in Figure 10 19 The SCSI bus terminators must be enabled on any drive that is mounted in the front position of the Winchester Drive Tray A drive mounted in the rear position on a tray must never have its bus terminators enabled The modules provide end termination for the SCSI bus when the Winchester Drive Tray is present With the tray removed resistor terminators on the Winchester Drive Interface WDD circuit board in the Winchester Dive Assembly provide the bus termination Before mounting the drive be sure that it is pinned correctly and has bus termination modules installed if the drive will be mounted at the front position on the tray The SCSI bus address and SCSI bus termination module information was discussed previously in this subsection Place the tray in an upright position Grasp the printed flex circuit connector and move the drive to the connector Do not grasp the printed flex circuit itself Connect the power cable connector to its mating connector on the drive Both connectors are held in place by the mated connection friction
94. ad Sector List Each drive has many spare sectors Reassigning a bad sector to the Bad Sector List uses one of the available spare sectors The sectors added to the Bad Sector List will be lost forever 7 Using utility commands reload the known bad file from a known good source again This should repair the degraded file 8 Using utility commands verify that the file in question can now be read successfully 9 Load the History Module Operating HMO personality software by performing a History Module autoboot 10 Initiate the collection of history data if needed 11 Restart the function that was aborted when the History Module failure was detected ATTENTION TIf you use the Sector Reassignment function be aware that it does have one undesirable feature Some of the sectors that contain the original file will be lost from the Sector Allocation tables These lost sectors cannot be reclaimed until an initialization of the complete drive is accomplished This will necessitate a complete save initialization and reload operation Fortunately it can be scheduled as a planned activity 12 02 History Module Service 101 5 3 8 Nonredundant Drive Data Error Recovery continued Quick fix procedure when drive initialization and reload are required ATTENTION Use the procedure in Table 5 15 when drive initialization and reload are required If the HMI personality software is available in the H
95. address 5 When you have a single drive History Module this is the only drive The drive is always assigned address 5 and is mounted in a single Winchester Drive Module Figure 2 6 illustrates the drive position and address assignment of the drive on the tray assembly Figure 2 6 210 445 875 MB or 1 8 GB Drive Positioning and Address Assignments Drive 5 Drive 5 Address 5 Address 5 Drive 3 Address 3 Single Drive History Module Dual Drive History Module 16751 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 29 2 2 2 210 445 875 MB and 1 8 GB History Module Description Continued Single drive Figure 2 7 illustrates the components and interconnections between the configuration SPC I O circuit board and a single drive Three SCSI bus termination resistor modules must be installed on the bottom of the 210 MB or 445 MB drive Figure 2 7 Single 210 445 875 MB or 1 8 GB Drive History Module Components and Interconnections 5 Slot Module HM 5 Slot Module HM SPC 51401052 100 5 Et ee Fan Power Supply Rear View Front View Front Panel Omitted SPC I O 51304156 100 LND p 51107403 100 1 Ep Lone o J tena O L C OH Bas toh liz t 51190728 105 iNi Eat 51190728 105 Fan Assembly Cable SCSI Bus Ribbon Cable jp Drive Power Supply 51303549 100 51304191 100 Power Cord Fan Assembly Drive 5 Rear View DC
96. affects the whole volume for example a directory error the volume has its status set to CORRUPTED If the volume with the error is critical the function associated with that volume is stopped but operation of other functions can continue e On line sector initialization reassignment is available for redundant drives through an SMCC function This permits the repair of a drive with media defects without physically disconnecting the drive or running HVTS The sector initialization reassignment function is covered in subsection 5 3 9 e In situations where a nonrecoverable data error occurs and the History Module software can identify the bad sector number the software generates a journal message and a Status Detail display message containing this information This information is required in the SMCC sector initialization reassignment function e It is possible to boot load from the redundant drive when an error is encountered on the initial disk accessed e The Status Detail and Object Detail displays provide status information on drives History Module functions and drive volumes as an important aid to troubleshooting drive problems These displays are discussed in subsections 5 3 11 and 5 3 12 respectively Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 96 5 3 7 Data Error Recovery Technics and Documentation Continued Other manuals that aid with recovery scenarios HVTS information In using the recove
97. ailable with Type II Drives For a nonredundant drive try an autoboot If you are not successful load the History Module Initialization HMI personality and save as much data as possible Then try running HVTS If you cannot run HVTS the drive is probably beyond repair and must be replaced If you can load and run HVTS you may be able to repair media defects on the disk by detecting bad sectors and adding them to the Bad Sector List If recovery time is critical you can simply replace the drive then initialize and reload the History Module For redundant drives the normal procedure is to replace the defective drive while leaving the History Module on line running with the redundant drive If it is presently possible to place the History Module off line you can attempt to repair the defective drive using HVTS For a nonredundant drive the faulty sector can be initialized or reassigned using the SMCC function under the HMI personality See subsection 5 3 8 Then the bad file is reloaded if required However in certain situations the entire disk will require initialization and reloading If this is anticipated save as much data as possible prior to attempting the disk repair This is not available with Type II Drives For a redundant drive the faulty sector can be initialized or reassigned using the SMCC function without placing the History Module off line The drive is placed off line for repair through the SMCC function
98. al WREN III Drive Configuration D0 Oe 2 Rear View Dual Drives O S Set Jumpers as H ee a TPERPER Shown for Correct 21 0 PTP SFour Pnysical Drives 0 P TP System Addresses Address 5 T 3 OO000 oOoOo0o0o0o0o0 HE O ofelo Re Remove Terminators OO ojejo from All 4 Drives 21 0 P TP 21 0PTP Address 4 Address 2 12 02 History Module Service 210 9 6 2 2 Dual WREN III Drive Cabling Dual drive cabling Ribbon cable red stripe positioning Avoid the fan blades Figure 9 35 illustrates a side view of the cable routing for redundant dual WREN III drives The single SCSI bus ribbon cable from the SPC I O circuit card in the I O card cage at the rear of the electronics module passes through a slotted hole in the back of the lower Winchester Drive Module and routes over the slide out tray assembly to Drive 4 then back to Drive 2 The cable exits the lower Winchester Drive Module and enters the upper Winchester Drive Module where it connects to Drive 5 then to Drive 3 Finally it connects to a bus terminator card that is mounted at the top of the upper Winchester Drive Module chassis The bus terminator card is illustrated in Figure 9 31 A top view of the Winchester Drive Modules is illustrated in Figure 9 36 The SCSI bus ribbon cable always connects to a WREN III drive with the red stripe on the right side of the drive as you face the connectors on the drive Use special care to prevent the ribbon cable fr
99. alled in slot 2 of the rear card cage as illustrated in Figure 10 1 Slide the SPCII I O circuit board into the slot until fully mated with the backpanel connectors There are no pinning requirements on the board Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 238 10 2 4 Circuit Board Replacement continued LCN address configuration K2LCN circuit board LCN node address selection The LCN node address can be selected on either the K2LCN K4LCN circuit board or the LCN I O CLCN A B board Configuring the LCN node address on the K2LCN K4LCN circuit board is preferred for consistency but selecting the address on either circuit board is acceptable However all the jumpers on the circuit board that is not being used for address selection must be removed or if the board uses configuration switches as a substitute for the jumpers the switches must be placed in their zero 0 position The early production and current production K2LCN circuit boards 11 as illustrated in Figures 10 3 and 10 4 have an LCN node address pinning module at coordinate 9C and 7A respectively Pin the K2LCN board for the appropriate LCN node address All jumpers on the LCN I O circuit board must be removed if the LCN address is selected on the K2LCN circuit board If a CLCN A B is present its configuration switches must be in their zero 0 position The early production and current production K4LCN circuit boards 11 as illustrated
100. ally sensitive devices Use a personnel grounding strap and grounded work surfaces equipment Store and transport parts only on electrostatically safe containers 12 02 History Module Service 118 6 3 Nonredundant Winchester Drive Module Disassembly Overview Component references Preliminary disassembly Use these instructions in this subsection to remove the fan assembly and the slide tray assembly in the Winchester Drive Module s that is a component of a nonredundant drive History Module The slide tray assembly contains a drive power supply assembly and disk drive s and can be disassembled Go to the specific instructions in subsection 6 4 if you are disassembling a Winchester Drive Module for a redundant drive History Module Disassemble the module only to the extent necessary to repair or replace a defective part The item numbers referenced in this section are keyed to ballooned numbers in Figure 6 1 The item numbers are also referenced in Section 7 WREN Type History Module Assembly and Section 10 Spare Parts Figure 6 1 Winchester Drive Module Exploded View 6347 Remove the front cover by turning the two quarter turn fasteners and freeing the cover tabs from the chassis slots Place the power switch on the power supply 4 in the OFF position and note that the indicator on the power supply extinguishes 12 02 History Module Service 119 6 3 1 Fan Assembly Removal Procedur
101. and Analyzing Figure 5 2 drive 5 has failed with a Primary Code of 5 and a Secondary Code of 11 Table 5 8 indicates a Disk drive error with status failure Furthermore you find the Sense Key is 03 and the Sense Code is 10 Table 5 9 identifies the failure as a Data CRC or ECC error Sense Key 03 in Table 5 10 recommends that you Test the drive and reassign the failed media sectors If you proceed to subsection 5 3 6 you are directed to run a test that identifies bad sectors and reassigns them to the Bad Sector List as it reformats the drive The details of the test are given in subsection 9 5 1 12 02 History Module Service 92 5 3 5 Real Time Journal RTJ Messages RTJ messages Table 5 11 is a list of some Real Time Journal RTJ messages from the History Module that do not necessarily indicate a failed drive The interpretation of each message and possible error symptoms are listed in the table Troubleshooting responses are suggested Table 5 11 Real Time Journal RTJ Messages Interpretation Symptom Action Message HM11 TS BG_EXEC 000B305C OOOEF3E4 OOOEF59A 502 46 0 0 The 502 46 message indicates a double bit error in memory during a scrub routine None Check for a defective K2LCN or K4LCN circuit board Message KSMMIK_CP ESL_EVNT_MGT exception type 03 06 Driver Name WDS CMDREG PRIM 5 The system detected a physical error in t
102. and then brought back on line using the SYNCH command See subsection 5 3 9 After the repair use the SYNCH utility to data synchronize the drive This is not available with Type II Drives 12 02 History Module Service 95 5 3 7 Data Error Recovery Technics and Documentation Overview Error handling technics The two subsections that follow provide recommended procedures for handling unrecoverable data errors on drives The term unrecoverable data error means that the History Module disk handler software has encountered an error while attempting to read a sector has retried reading the sector several times without success and has displayed an error message while modifying the status of the History Module drive or volume as appropriate These errors can be caused by media defects or by electrical transients Errors caused by transients can sometimes be corrected by rewriting the sector Errors due to media defects require that the sector or sectors that are affected must no longer be used by the software The History Module error handling technics available are as follows e An unreadable data sector on a nonredundant drive may not necessarily cause the failure of the entire History Module providing the History Module with a level of fault tolerance If an unrecoverable data error is encountered in a specific file the volume containing the file has its status set to DEGRADED See subsection 5 3 8 If the error
103. ant Single 210 445 875 MB or 1 8 GB Drive SCSI Winchester Disk Drive 5 Top View of Upper Drive Chassis Cable Clam Red Lin I O Card Cage Electronic Chassis Red Line Winchester Disk Drive 4 Top View of Lower Drive Chassis 11851 12 02 History Module Service 232 Section 10 WDA Type History Module Assembly 10 1 Overview Section contents The topics covered in this section are Topic See Page 10 1 Overview 257 10 2 History Module Assembly 259 10 2 1 General Assembly 259 10 2 2 Fan Assembly Replacement 260 10 2 3 Power Supply Replacement 260 10 2 4 Circuit Board Replacement 261 10 2 5 Cabling Replacement 270 10 2 6 Winchester Disk Assembly Replacement 271 10 3 Winchester Disk Assembly Reassembly 272 10 4 Winchester Drive Tray Assembly 273 10 4 1 General Information 273 10 4 2 Winchester Disk Drive Replacement 275 Purpose This section describes the assembly of the WDA History Module with major components that includes the circuit boards Winchester Disk Assembly Winchester disk drive s power supply fan assembly and the module cabling Reference Refer to the Five Ten Slot Module Service manual for assembly procedures where applicable In particular the installation of the K2LCN or K4LCN circuit board and its associated I O circuit board the LCN I O CLCN A B is detailed in the Five Ten Slot Module Service manual All the other circuit boar
104. artup Use the procedure in Table 12 2 to restart a WDA type History Module procedure after replacing a defective component other than a drive Power was removed from the History Module Table 12 2 Restarting a WDA Type History Module Procedure Component Replacement Step Action 1 Place the Winchester Drive Tray power switch es in the ON position Place the power supply power ON OFF switch in the ON position Check that all red LEDs extinguish and that all green LEDs illuminate within approximately 1 5 minutes Check that the alphanumeric display on the K2LCN K4LCN circuit board shows the correct LCN node address for the History Module Verify that the History Module has autobooted properly and that its data is valid Examine the status of the History Module at the Universal Station and test for History Module related activities If the data is not valid continue with this procedure You must now initialize the History Module using the original NCF See the Network Data Entry manual for details Restore the local volume and system software files Restore the Continuous History data See subsection 7 7 in the Engineer s Reference Manual Restore all other files Refer to the Command Processor Operation manual After all of your files have been restored autoboot the History Module by either doing a double shutdown from the Universal Station or by placing the power supply s ON OFF switch in the
105. assembly 12 02 History Module Service 124 Section 7 WDA Type I History Module Disassembly 7 1 Overview Section contents The topics covered in this section are Topic See Page 7 1 7 2 7 2 1 7 2 2 7 2 3 7 2 4 7 2 5 7 3 7 3 1 Overview 127 History Module Disassembly 128 General Disassembly 129 Fan Assembly Removal 130 Power Supply Removal 130 Circuit Board Removal 131 Winchester Disk Assembly Removal 132 Winchester Drive Tray Disassembly 133 Winchester Disk Drive Removal 136 caution Purpose caution Before disassembly CAUTION Risk of electric shock This section describes disassembly of the major components of the History Module including removal of the electronics boards Winchester Disk Assembly Winchester disk drive s power supply fan assembly and disconnection of the module cabling CAUTION Do not attempt any disassembly or repair the History Module without first conducting orderly testing and troubleshooting procedures Return to Section 4 if you do not have a clear understanding of which part in the History Module has failed YOU MUST OBTAIN OPERATOR PERMISSION BEFORE PLACING THE HISTORY MODULE OFF LINE FOR TESTING Disassemble the major components of the History Module only to the extent necessary to repair or replace a defective part For a nonredundant drive system always use the Universal Station to select the failed node from the Hi
106. at you feel you have identified the area in the History Module that has failed decide from the information in this subsection and the appropriate area in subsection 5 3 7 what your repair replace strategy will be Consider the following e If necessary use Section 5 or 6 to disassemble the History Module Be sure you pay special attention to some of the shut down and power off sequences required for the equipment e If necessary use Section 7 or 8 to reassemble the components of the History Module Pay particular attention to proper jumper block pinning and termination of the drive and the connection of any cables you may have removed e Section 9 contains formatting details for the Winchester disk drive e After a drive has been formatted it is electrically operational However it must still be initialized and the files that were previously on the drive must be restored before it can be placed in service e Use Section 10 to determine the replacement parts you need if any The best maintenance strategy will depend on the nature of the failure the drive s in use and the criticality of the lost functionality If the drive has a redundant partner operation can continue with the backup drive and the faulty drive can be replaced or repaired without disrupting the process or losing any data If the drive does not have a redundant partner and the error is confined to a single file or volume that is noncritical to the process it may be p
107. bers used in this section are keyed to ballooned numbers in Figure 11 1 These item numbers are also used in Section 6 WDA Type History Module Disassembly Figures 3 1 and 3 2 are other views of typical History Module assemblies The CE Compliant version is slightly different in appearance WDA History Module Exploded View CAUTION CAUTION When assembling the History Module power must be removed from the module either by disconnecting the module s power cord or by placing the power supply s ON OFF switch in the OFF position whichever is applicable The exception is the installation of a Winchester Drive Tray The tray can be installed while power is applied to the module but the tray s ON OFF switch must be in the OFF position when installing the tray However the tray s ON OFF switch must be placed in the ON position immediately after installing the tray 12 02 History Module Service 269 11 2 2 Fan Assembly Replacement Assembly procedure Slide the fan assembly 3 into the chassis being careful that the connector at the rear of the assembly mates properly Secure the fan assembly with the two fasteners 11 2 3 Power Supply Replacement Assembly procedure Be sure the power supply s ON OFF switch is in the OFF position Slide the power supply 2 into the module until it begins to mate with its backpanel connectors Then press on the extractor levers located on each side of the ass
108. bing its redundant partner that is mounted on another tray interfacing the same SCSI bus Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 47 3 3 Physical Configuration continued SCSI bus The SCSI bus ribbon cables and printed flex circuits are a group of transmission lines and must be resistor terminated at each end of the SCSI bus The SPC circuit board contains no bus terminators since it is central to the bus Figure 3 6 illustrates the routing of the SCSI bus when both Winchester Drive Trays are present and both trays contain dual drives Figure 3 6 SCSI Bus and Termination Interconnections Slot 2 Front Special Peripheral Controller SPC Board Backplane Connector Slot 2 Rear SPCIl I O Board SCSI Bus ae Ribbon Cable Soo Slot 5 Rear WDI I O Board A aa as Sess Backplane Connector lt i Slot 5 Front Winchester Drive Interface WDI Board i i i li L li L li I li l E Drive 2 Drive 3 i k i i Rear Disk Rear Disk i Drive Drive i l I li 1 SCSI Bus SCSI Bus Printed Printed 1 Flex Circuit Flex Circuit l 1 i I i Drive 4 Drive 5 1 i Front Disk Front Disk l ra Drive i I li I o li li i Left Hand Winchester Drive Tray Wits aa a a oo ere Pa ee Winchester Disk Assembly Note A redundant dual drive configuration is shown If a tray has a single drive mounted on it the drive will always occupy the front position a
109. ble 5 9 to find the cause of the problem Table 5 9 Drive Sense Keys Sense Codes Step Action Result 00 No Error 00 No sense data 01 Recovered 17 Recovered read data error Error 01 Recovered 18 Recovered read data error Error 02 Not Ready 04 Drive not ready 03 Media Error 10 Data CRC or ECC error 03 Media Error 11 Unrecovered read error 03 Media Error 12 No address mark in ID 03 Media Error 14 No record found 03 Media Error 15 Seek positioning error 03 Media Error 19 Defect List error 03 Media Error 1C Primary Defect List not found 03 Media Error 31 Medium format corrupted 03 Media Error 32 No defect spare available 04 Hardware Error 01 No index signal 04 Hardware Error 02 No seek complete Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 90 5 3 4 SMCC Detailed Module Error Messages continued Sense Key and Sense Codes continued Table 5 9 Drive Sense Keys Sense Codes Continued Step Action Result 04 Hardware Error 03 Write failure 04 Hardware Error 08 Logical unit failure 04 Hardware Error 09 Track following error 04 Hardware Error 40 RAM failure 04 Hardware Error 41 Data path failure 04 Hardware Error 42 Diagnostic failure 04 Hardware Error 44 Internal controller error 04 Hardware Error 47 SCSI bus interface parity error 05 Illegal Request 20 Invalid command 05 Illegal Request 21 Illegal lo
110. cage at the rear of the electronics module passes through a slotted hole in the back of the Winchester Drive Module above the electronics module and routes over the slide tray assembly to the drive If itis a single drive History Module the cable ends at the drive If it is a dual drive History Module the cable exits the lower Winchester Drive Module module 1 then enters the upper Winchester Drive Module module 2 and connects to the drive in the upper module The SCSI bus ribbon cable must always connect to a 210 MB 445 MB 875 MB or 1 8 GB drive with the red stripe at the right side of the drive as you face the connectors on the drive Use special care to prevent the ribbon cables from interfering with the rotating fan blades in the fan assembly The cable must be held in place by cable clamps on the tray assembly to avoid the fan blades Note that the cable is folded so it can make a 90 turn up to the drive connector Refer to Figures 9 24 top view and 9 25 side view which illustrate the cable routing for a single drive configuration A 210 MB or 445 MB drive must have terminator resistor modules installed on it to terminate the end of the SCSI bus cable An 875 MB or 1 8 GB drive must have its internal SCSI bus terminators enabled Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 197 9 5 6 Single Dual 210 445 875 MB or 1 8 GB Drive Cabling Continued Single drive SCSI cable routing top
111. cation on a tray The Options and Parity Remote Start jumper blocks have fixed jumper positions for all drive mounting positions Three of the jumper blocks must be altered if necessary to accommodate the mounting location of the drive on either a right hand or left hand tray front or rear position These are the Active Passive Termination Terminator Power and SCSI Drive Address jumper blocks Table 10 1 and Figure 10 13 illustrate the proper positioning of the jumpers on each jumper block for the drive s mounting position Table 10 1 210 Megabyte Drive SCSI Device Address Selection Device Tray SCSI Device Address Jumper Position Location Left Hand Rear 2 3 to 4 Right Hand Rear 3 3 to 4 and 5 to 6 Left Hand Front 4 1 to2 Right Hand Front 5 1 to 2 and 5to6 Replacement drives are shipped from the factory pinned for a SCSI device address of 5 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 251 10 4 2 Winchester Disk Drive Replacement continued 210 megabyte drive The locations of the jumper blocks on the drive are illustrated in jumper block Figure 10 13 Only the Active Passive Termination Terminator Power locations and SCSI Drive Address jumper blocks should be altered SCSI drive addresses of 2 3 4 and 5 are the only valid addresses Figure 10 13 210 Megabyte Drive Jumper Block Selections Bottom View Options Jumper Block None Selected for Drives 2 5 P
112. cations of the three jumper blocks The jumper blocks should be checked for proper positioning of the jumpers based upon the drive s mounting location on a tray The SCSI Address Remote J6 jumper block is not used in any drive mounting positions There should be no jumpers installed on the jumper block Two jumper blocks must be altered if necessary to accommodate the mounting location of the drive on either a right hand or left hand tray front or rear position These are the Option Select J2 and SCSI Address J5 jumper blocks Table 7 3 and Figure 7 8 illustrate the proper positioning of the jumpers on each jumper block for the drive s mounting position Table 7 3 875 MB Drive 51196680 100 SCSI Bus Address Selection Device Tray SCSI Device Address Jumper Position Location Left Hand Rear 2 2 Right Hand Rear 3 1 and 2 Left Hand Front 4 3 Right Hand Front 5 1 and 3 Replacement drives are shipped from the factory pinned for a SCSI device address of 5 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 141 7 3 1 Winchester Disk Drive Removal continued 875 megabyte drive The locations of the jumper blocks on the 875 megabyte drive etd block 51196680 100 are illustrated in Figure 7 8 Only the Options Select J2 erisessoael and SCSI Address J5 jumper blocks should be altered SCSI drive addresses of 2 3 4 and 5 are the only valid addresses Figure 7 8 875 Megaby
113. cccececeeseeeeereeeteeeees 87 Status Detail Display ccccceccceeeeeceeeeeceeeeeceaeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeesaeeseeeeee 108 Status Detail Display Drive Selected ecceeeeeeeeeeeteeseteeeeaeeeeeeeees 110 Volume Status Display Page 1 cceccceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseaeeseeeeeeeees 111 Volume Status Display Page 2 cecccceeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseaeeeeaeeennees 111 Engineering Personality Main Menu Display c ceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 115 SMCC Main Menu Display ccccecececeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeaeeseeeeeseaeeesaeeseeeeees 115 Sector Initialization Reassignment Menu Display cceceeeeereeee 116 Sector Initialization Reassignment Menu Verification Display 116 Winchester Drive Module Exploded View ccceeeesseeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeaas 119 Redundant Drive Positioning and Address Assignments 122 WDA History Module Exploded View ccceeesseeceeeeeeeeeteieeeeeeteeeeneae 127 Single Drive Winchester Drive Tray Exploded View cceseeeeees 132 Dual Drive Winchester Drive Tray Exploded VieW ceeceeeeeeneeees 132 210 Megabyte Drive Jumper Block Selections Bottom View 136 Bottom View of 210 MB Drive with SCSI Bus Terminators 005 137 445 Megabyte Drive Jumper Block Selections Bottom View 139 Bottom View of 445 MB Drive with SCSI Bus Terminators 005 140 875 Megabyt
114. ch is OFFLINE and that its redundant partner is operational Be sure both drives of a dual redundant configuration are OFFLINE Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 157 8 3 Winchester Drive Tray Disassembly Continued Before beginning disassembly Before beginning disassembly consider whether or not the History Module has redundant drives If the module does not contain redundant drives power can be removed from the drive s mounted on the right hand Winchester Drive Tray at the power supply or the tray by placing their respective power ON OFF switch in the OFF position Should the History Module contain redundant drives then remove power only at the Winchester Drive Tray that contains the defective drive Disassemble the Winchester Drive Tray only to the extent necessary to replace a defective part The item numbers used in this subsection are keyed to ballooned numbers in Figures 8 2 and 8 3 Figure 8 2 Single Drive Winchester Drive Tray Exploded View Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 158 8 3 Winchester Drive Tray Disassembly Continued CAUTION Winchester Drive Tray description Termination caution CAUTION The drive s mounted on the tray is an electrostatically sensitive device Use a grounding strap and grounded work surfaces equipment Store and transport parts only in electrostatically safe containers The Winchester Drive Tray
115. chester Dive Assembly provide the bus termination 12 02 History Module Service 149 12 02 History Module Service 150 Section 8 WDA History Module with Dual Logical Drive Tray Disassembly 8 1 Overview Section contents The topics covered in this section are Topic See Page 8 1 8 2 8 2 1 8 2 2 8 2 3 8 2 4 8 2 5 8 3 8 3 1 Overview 153 History Module Disassembly 154 General Disassembly 155 Fan Assembly Removal 156 Power Supply Removal 156 Circuit Board Removal 157 Winchester Disk Assembly Removal 158 Winchester Drive Tray Disassembly 159 Winchester Disk Drive Removal 162 Purpose Before disassembly CAUTION Risk of electric shock This section describes disassembly of the major components of the History Module including removal of the electronics boards Winchester Disk Assembly Winchester disk drive s power supply fan assembly and disconnection of the module cabling CAUTION Do not attempt any disassembly or repair the History Module without first conducting orderly testing and troubleshooting procedures Return to Section 4 if you do not have a clear understanding of which part in the History Module has failed YOU MUST OBTAIN OPERATOR PERMISSION BEFORE PLACING THE HISTORY MODULE OFF LINE FOR TESTING Disassemble the major components of the History Module only to the extent necessary to repair or replace a defective part For a nonredundant driv
116. cing a drive ina WREN type startup procedure History Module that has a redundant partner Table 12 5 Restarting a WREN Type History Module Procedure Redundant Drive Replacement Step Action 1 Power was removed from the Winchester Drive Module that housed the defective drive Place the drive power supply s AC POWER switch in the 1 ON position The green LED on the power supply should be lit Check that the red LED on the fan assembly is not lit Secure the cover s to the module s 2 Perform the data synchronization procedure detailed in subsection 12 4 After the synchronization has been successfully completed you will be on line and in an operating state WDA type HM startup Use the procedure in Table 12 6 when replacing a drive in a WDA type procedure History Module that has a redundant partner Table 12 6 Restarting a WDA Type History Module Procedure Redundant Drive Replacement Step Action 1 Power was not removed from the History Module power supply Instead power was removed from the Winchester Drive Tray on which you replaced a drive Place the tray s power switch in the ON position after it is reinstalled 2 Perform the data synchronization procedure detailed in subsection 12 4 After the synchronization has been successfully completed you will be on line and in an operating state 12 4 Redundant Disk Drive Data Synchronization Overview After
117. contains the following components e One Winchester ST39175LW disk drive e A ribbon cab le 3 that interconnects the drive 1 with the tray connector 4 that interfaces to the WDI circuit board in the Winchester Disk Assembly The ribbon cable provides the SCSI bus interface to the drive s e A power ON OFF switch 6 to control power from the power supply to the drive s and SCSI bus terminators on the WDI circuit board in the Winchester Disk Assembly When power is removed from the tray SCSI bus terminators are activated on the WDI circuit board in anticipation of the loss of the bus terminators installed on a Winchester disk drive on the tray that is about to be removed The terminators are installed on the drive that is mounted at the front of the tray e A tray power connector 7 that interfaces to the WDI circuit board in the Winchester Disk Assembly and provides 5 Vdc 12 Vdc and ground return to the drive s from the power supply e An extractor lever 8 used to lock the tray in place in the Winchester Disk Assembly and assist in extracting the tray when it is in place The SCSI cable is terminated by a termination model attached to the drive end of the SCSI interface cable CAUTION When power is removed from a Winchester Drive Tray the tray must be removed from the Winchester Disk Assembly as soon as possible because the SCSI bus terminators on the WDI circuit board in the Winchester Disk Assembly are electronically
118. cover s to the module s 2 Place the POWER switch on the electronics module in the ON 1 position Check that all red LEDs extinguish and all green LEDs illuminate within 1 5 minutes Also note the alphanumeric display and ensure that it displays the proper LCN node address for the History Module 3 Verify that the History Module has autobooted properly and that its data is valid Examine the status of the History Module at the Universal Station and test for History Module related activities If the data is not valid continue with this procedure 4 You must now initialize the History Module using the original NCF See the Network Data Entry manual for details 5 Restore the local volume and system software files 6 Restore the Continuous History data See subsection 7 7 in the Engineer s Reference Manual 7 Restore all other files Refer to the Command Processor Operation manual 8 After all of your files have been restored autoboot the History Module by either doing a double shutdown from the Universal Station or by placing the electronics module s power supply switch in the OFF 0 position for approximately 30 seconds then back to the ON 1 position If the autoboot is unsuccessful go to the troubleshooting techniques in Section 5 or call TAC for assistance Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 290 12 3 1 Component Replacement Startup continued WDA type HM st
119. ct addressing The Active Passive Termination jumper block must have jumpers between pins 2 and 4 and pins 5 and 6 because SCSI bus termination resistor modules must be installed on the Winchester disk drive The Terminator Power jumper block must have jumper between pins 1 and 2 because SCSI bus termination resistor modules must be installed on the Winchester disk drive The Parity Remote Start jumper block must have a jumper between pins 1 and 2 to enable data parity checking Terminator resistor modules must be installed on the drive as illustrated in Figure 9 13 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 177 9 5 2 Terminated 210 MB Drive 5 jumper block Single Dual 210 MB Drive Pinning continued selections Figure 9 12 Terminated 210 MB Drive 5 Jumper Block Selections Bottom View Options Jumper Block None Selected for Drives 2 5 PWB SCSI Drive Address Parity Remote Start pwB Jumper Block S Jumper Block PWB Ground Drive 5 Signal 51196220 100 Termination Resistor ee ee Active Passive Termination Jumper Block VO Connector 5 3 1 PWB Drive As a 5 BOO 6 4 2 DC Power Connector Terminator Power Jumper Block PWB 5 Vdc 5 Volts Return 12 Volts Return 12 Vdc 11837 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 178 9 5 2 Single Dual 210 MB Drive Pinning continued 210 MB drive terminator modules Figure 9
120. d at the corners and the forward center of the board and available through access holes at the top of the assembly chassis There is a spacer used with each fastener The spacers are very important when mounting the circuit board because without the spacers the circuit board will not mate properly with its backpanel connectors Since it is very difficult to install the WDI circuit board using spacers it is recommended that the circuit board not be replaced in the field Instead the Winchester Disk Assembly should be replaced if it is suspected that the circuit board has failed The WDI circuit board cannot be ordered as a spare part 12 02 History Module Service 130 7 3 Winchester Drive Tray Disassembly Overview These instructions cover the disassembly of the right hand or left hand Winchester Drive Tray and the removal of the Winchester disk drive s mounted on the tray In a nonredundant History Module configuration the left hand Winchester Drive Tray will not be present A Winchester Drive Tray can contain one single drive or two dual drives General You are probably removing a Winchester Drive Tray and replacing a drive because you were informed by the History Module Status display that a DISKPROB exists If you have redundant drives be sure you request status from the Command Processor to verify the address of the failed drive which is OFFLINE and that its redundant partner is operational Be sure both drives of
121. d on the LCN I O circuit board Slide the board into the slot until it is fully mated with the backpanel connectors after configuring the board for the appropriate LCN node address Figure 10 7 LCN I O Board LCN Node Address Selection LCN I O BOARD FROM REAR SLOT 2 51107403 100 Binary Weight Jumper Removed 1 P Parity Overall number of jumpers 6 64 omitted including the 5 32 parity jumper must be an odd number This example 4 16 indicates node address 03 3 8 2 4 1 2 0 1 NOTE The software will allow only node addresses 1 64 at this time 2923 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 244 10 2 4 Circuit Board Replacement continued CLCN A B board LCN The CLCN A B board is the CE Compliant version of the LCN I O board node address selection Figure 10 8 illustrates LCN node address selection on the CLCN A B board The figure illustrates an LCN node address of seven 7 Placing a switch in the zero 0 position is a binary 1 Parity must be an odd number Slide the board into the slot until it is fully mated with the backpanel connectors after configuring the board for the appropriate LCN node address Figure 10 8 CLCN A B Board LCN Node Address Selection P C ASSY NO 51305072 100 o REV A 6 Q 8 5 oc lt 4 3 2 1 0 LCN Address 16749 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 245 10 2 4 Circuit Board Repl
122. d on next page 12 02 History Module Service 110 5 3 12 Volume Status Display continued Volume Status display The Volume Status displays are illustrated in Figures 5 5 and 5 6 illustrations Figure 5 5 Volume Status Display Page 1 li Jun 91 i 13 15 2 M NODE 50 VOLUME STATUS DISPLAY PAGE 1 OF 2 DRIVE 5 ORIVE 4 NOT PRESENT 190 200 amp T0 260 58 TAG T20 7879 Figure 5 6 Volume Status Display Page 2 di Jun 91 10 13 33 1 HM NODE 50 VOLUME STATUS DISPLAY PAGE 2 OF 2 DRIVE 3 NOT PRESENT DRIVE 2 NOT PRESENT 7880 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 111 5 3 12 Volume Status Display continued Volume Status display The status on the Volume Status display that is of interest to the status troubleshooting process are listed in Table 5 23 Table 5 23 Volume Status Display Status Status Explanation OK The normal error free status DEGRADED An error in a file but other files in the volume are accessible CORRUPTED The entire volume is inaccessible Possibly an error in the directory SYN_IP Synchronization is in process synchronizing a drive with its redundant partner so that both have identical data NOT INITIALIZED The volume has been created but has not been synchronized It has been placed off line Performing a synchronization will place the volume on line This state will be seen on drives 0
123. dressing e The Option J2 jumper block must have no jumpers installed on it The internal SCSI bus terminators on the drive must not be enabled SCSI bus termination The internal SCSI bus terminators on either drive must not be enabled Bus termination is provided at the drive end of the SCSI bus cable by a bus terminator card Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 224 9 7 1 3 Single 875 MB Drive Pinning continued Nonterminated 875 Figure 9 44 illustrates the jumper selections for the 875 MB drive MB Drive 5 jumper 51196680 200 when configured as a nonterminated Drive 5 block selections 51196680 200 Figure 9 44 Nonterminated 875 MB Drive 5 51196680 200 Jumper Block Selections Bottom View SCSI Bus Address Jumper Block Drive 5 AO Ai A2 Option Jumper Block Drive 5 Nonterminated PWB TE DS ME WP PD SS TP TP 16727 B Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 225 9 7 1 3 Single 875 MB Drive Installation continued Nonterminated 875 Figure 9 45 illustrates the jumper selections for the 875 MB drive MB Drive 4 jumper 51196680 200 when configured as a nonterminated Drive 4 block selections 51196680 200 Figure 9 45 Nonterminated 875 MB Drive 4 51196680 200 Jumper Block Selections Bottom View SCSI Bus Address Jumper Block Drive 4 AO A1 A2 Option Jumper Block Drive 4 Nonterminated PWB
124. drive bad sectors can be initialized or assigned to the Bad Sector List while system operation continues using the good drive 12 02 History Module Service 54 3 6 1 Single Disk Drive Configuration Overview Drive pinning SCSI bus termination modules The redundant single drive configuration is physically similar to the nonredundant single drive configuration illustrated in Figure 3 7 except both Winchester Drive Trays in the Winchester Disk Assembly have a single Winchester disk drive mounted at the front of the tray As illustrated in Figure 3 11 the drive mounted on the right hand primary Winchester Drive Tray is labeled Drive 5 and must be pinned configured for SCSI bus address 5 The redundant partner mounted on the left hand secondary Winchester Drive Tray is labeled Drive 4 and must be pinned configured for SCSI bus address 4 Pinning of the drive is discussed in subsection 9 4 2 Figure 3 11 Redundant Single Drive Configuration amp laz Drive 4 Drive 4 Drive 5 Redundant Single Drives 12821 The SCSI bus termination modules must be installed on the bottom of 210 megabyte and 445 megabyte drives as illustrated in Figure 3 11 The terminators installed on Drives 4 and 5 terminate the two ends of the SCSI bus The 875 megabyte and 1 8 gigabyte drives do not have bus termination modules Instead internal bus terminators are enabled electronically on the d
125. drive on either a right hand or left hand tray front or rear position These are the Option Select J2 and SCSI Address J5 jumper blocks Table 10 3 and Figure 10 17 illustrate the proper positioning of the jumpers on each jumper block for the drive s mounting position Table 10 3 875 MB Drive 51196680 100 SCSI Bus Address Selection Device Tray SCSI Device Address Jumper Position Location Left Hand Rear 2 2 Right Hand Rear 3 1 and 2 Left Hand Front 4 3 Right Hand Front 5 1 and 3 Replacement drives are shipped from the factory pinned for a SCSI device address of 5 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 257 10 4 2 Winchester Disk Drive Removal continued 875 megabyte drive The locations of the jumper blocks on the drive are illustrated in MPE Figure 8 17 Only the Options Select J2 and SCSI Address J5 jumper blocks should be altered SCSI drive addresses of 2 3 4 and 5 are the only valid addresses Figure 10 17 875 Megabyte Drive 51196680 100 Jumper Block Selections Bottom View 51196680 100 SCSI Address Remote Jumper Block Not Used No Jumpers SCSI Drive Address Jumper Block Drive See Address Selection Table Bottom Option Select Jumper Block Drives 4 and 5 PWB Na J2 5 Aes enn A 12345678 J1 Option Select Jumper Block Drives 2 and 3 J2 5 Vdc 5 Volts Return PWB 12 Volts R
126. drives the tray contains Depending on the History Module configuration one or two Winchester disk drives are mounted on the tray See Section 2 for a description of the allowable drive configurations A nonredundant History Module will have a single drive mounted on the right hand tray The left hand tray will be absent A redundant History Module will have a single drive mounted on both the right hand and left hand trays The number of drives and their orientation must be the same on each tray A tray can be installed in the Winchester Disk Assembly while power is applied to the History Module the power supply s ON OFF switch is in the ON position However the tray s ON OFF switch must be in the OFF position when installing the tray CAUTION Always follow proper ESD Electrostatic Discharge procedures when handling circuit boards and other electronic components 12 02 History Module Service 268 11 2 History Module Assembly 11 2 1 General Assembly Purpose Figure 11 1 This subsection contains instructions for the assembly of the WDA History Module Use those subsections necessary to reassemble the module with parts you removed by following instructions in Section 4 When specific configuration or cabling instructions for a given part or assembly are required notes or special instructions in the text will assist you or reference you to the subsection where those instructions can be found The item num
127. ds used in the WDA History Module other than the Smart Peripheral Controller SPC circuit board are unique to the WDA History Module Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 233 10 1 Overview Continued History Module description The Winchester Disk Assembly that occupies the upper two card slot locations in the module chassis can contain two Winchester Drive Trays The trays are physically and electrically identical except for the number of drives the tray contains Depending on the History Module configuration one or two Winchester disk drives are mounted on the tray See Section 2 for a description of the allowable drive configurations A nonredundant History Module will have single or dual drives mounted on the right hand tray The left hand tray will be absent A redundant History Module will have single or dual drives mounted on both the right hand and left hand trays The number of drives and their orientation must be the same on each tray A tray can be installed in the Winchester Disk Assembly while power is applied to the History Module the power supply s ON OFF switch is in the ON position However the tray s ON OFF switch must be in the OFF position when installing the tray CAUTION Always follow proper ESD Electrostatic Discharge procedures when handling circuit boards and other electronic components 12 02 History Module Service 234 10 2 History Module Assembly 10 2 1 Genera
128. e cccccccsseeeeesteeeeeees 167 SPC Board Address Pinning for SCSI Bus Address csseeeeeeees 169 Single WREN III Drive Configuration and Termination Nonredundant 170 Dual WREN III Drive Configuration and Termination Nonredundant 171 SCSI Cable Routing for Single WREN III Drive 172 Single WREN III Drive SCSI Cable Installation 0 cccceeeeeeeeteeeees 173 SCSI Cable Routing for Dual WREN III Drives ececeesseeeeeesteeeeees 174 SPC Board Address Pinning for SCSI Bus Address ccsceeeeeeees 176 Terminated 210 MB Drive 5 Jumper Block Selections Bottom View 178 Bottom View of 210 MB Drive with SCSI Bus Terminator Modules Installed Sec orea eh bine ches lap et a aae aa a eaaa a 179 Nonterminated 210 MB Drive 3 Jumper Block Selections Bottom View 181 Terminated 445 MB Drive 5 Jumper Block Selections Bottom View 183 Bottom View of 445 MB Drive with SCSI Bus Terminator Modules WAStAN SG wset ect annaa a a aaa aa aaa aE Ta a aaa targeted 184 Nonterminated 445 MB Drive 3 Jumper Block Selections Bottom View 186 Terminated 875 MB Drive 5 51196680 100 Jumper Block Selections 188 Terminated 875 MB Drive 5 51196680 200 Jumper Block Selections 189 Nonterminated 875 MB Drive 3 51196680 100 Jumper Block Selections191 Nonterminated 875 MB Drive 3 51196680 200 Jumper Block Selections192 Terminated 1 8 GB Drive 5 Jumper Block Selections Bottom View 194 Nonterminated
129. e Remove the fan assembly 3 by turning the two fasteners and sliding the assembly out of the chassis The individual fans are not a replaceable item so the complete assembly must be replaced at the Optimum Replaceable Unit ORU level 6 3 2 Slide Tray Assembly Removal No shipping locks Disassembly procedure The WREN III 210 MB 445 MB 875 MB and 1 8 GB drives have no shipping locks They automatically lock when power is removed and unlock when power is applied to the drive Referencing Figure 6 1 use the following procedure to disassemble the slide tray assembly 1 Release the cable clamp s that holds the SCSI bus ribbon cable to the inside surface of the module chassis or the tray assembly Disconnect the AC power cord 2 from the power supply and the fan assembly cable 3 from its mating connector in front of the power supply on the slide tray assembly Loosen the bale headed fasteners on the tray assembly and pull the tray assembly out of the module chassis about 7 5 centimeters 3 inches Use extreme care not to damage ribbon cables on a sharp edge of the tray assembly or the module chassis Remove the connectors from the disk drive 5 on the tray assembly Note the dress of the ribbon cable s and the position of the ribbon cable connectors where they enter the drive In particular note the orientation of the stripe on the ribbon cable s The single SCSI bus ribbon cable for the WREN
130. e Board Real Time Journal Smart Controller Magnetic Disk System Maintenance Control Center Technical Assistance Center Winchester Disk Assembly 12 02 History Module Service xii References Publication Publication Binder Binder Title Number Title Number History Module Specification and HM03 500 System Summary 2 3010 2 Technical Data LCN System Installation SW 20 500 LCN Installation 3025 LCN System Checkout SW20 510 LCN Installation 3025 Engineer s Reference Manual SW09 505 Implementation Startup amp 3030 2 Reconfiguration 2 Command Processor Operation SW 11 507 Implementation Startup amp 3030 1 Reconfiguration 1 Five Ten Slot Module Service LC13 500 LCN Service 2 3060 2 System Maintenance Guide SW 13 500 LCN Service 1 3060 1 Maintenance Test Operations SW11 502 LCN Service 1 3060 1 Universal Station Service US13 500 LCN Service 1 3060 1 Test System Executive SW 13 510 LCN Service 3 3060 3 Hardware Verification Test System SW13 511 LCN Service 3 3060 3 12 02 History Module Service xiii 12 02 History Module Service xiv Section 1 Introduction 1 1 Overview Section contents The topics covered in this section are Topic See Page 1 1 1 Overview 17 2 Support Services and Documents 19 The manual s purpose WREN type History Module description WREN III type History Module WREN Ill upgrade WDA type History Module description This manual provides in
131. e Drive 51196680 100 Jumper Block Selections Bottom MIGW EE AAE E saavedhhs SevQuep E E T 142 12 02 History Module Service viii Figure 7 9 Figure 7 10 Figure 8 1 Figure 8 2 Figure 9 1 Figure 9 2 Figure 9 3 Figure 9 4 Figure 9 5 Figure 9 6 Figure 9 7 Figure 9 8 Figure 9 9 Figure 9 10 Figure 9 11 Figure 9 12 Figure 9 13 Figure 9 14 Figure 9 15 Figure 9 16 Figure 9 17 Figure 9 18 Figure 9 19 Figure 9 20 Figure 9 21 Figure 9 22 Figure 9 23 Figure 9 24 Figure 9 25 Figure 9 26 Figure 9 28 Figure 9 29 Figure 9 30 Figure 9 31 Figure 9 32 Figure 9 33 Figure 9 34 Figure 9 35 Figure 9 36 Figure 9 37 Figure 9 38 Figure 9 39 Figure 9 40 Figure 9 41 Figure 9 42 Figure 9 43 Figure 9 44 Figure 9 45 Figure 9 46 Figure 9 47 Figure 9 48 Figure 9 49 Figure 10 1 Figure 10 2 Figure 10 3 875 Megabyte Drive 51196680 200 Jumper Block Selections Bottom MIGW E AE E E E EA nena 145 1 8 Gigabyte Drive Jumper Block Selections Bottom View 148 WDA History Module Exploded View 00 ccseeeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaees 153 Single Drive Winchester Drive Tray Exploded View 158 Winchester Drive Module Exploded ViewW ceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 163 Assembly of Drive Shock Mount Hardware eceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeneees 165 Assembly of Adapter Plate to Drive eeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 166 Mounting the 210 445 875 MB or 1 8 GB Driv
132. e K2LCN K4LCN circuit board or the LCN I O CLCN A B board Configuring the LCN node address on the K2LCN K4LCN circuit board is preferred for consistency but selecting the address on either circuit board is acceptable However all the jumpers on the circuit board that is not being used for address selection must be removed or if the board uses configuration switches as a substitute for the jumpers the switches must be placed in their zero 0 position The early production and current production K2LCN circuit boards 11 as illustrated in Figures 11 3 and 11 4 have an LCN node address pinning module at coordinate 9C and 7A respectively Pin the K2LCN board for the appropriate LCN node address All jumpers on the LCN I O circuit board must be removed if the LCN address is selected on the K2LCN circuit board If a CLCN A B is present its configuration switches must be in their zero 0 position The early production and current production K4LCN circuit boards 11 as illustrated in Figures 11 5 and 11 6 have an LCN node address pinning module TS2 at locations 21E and 7A respectively Pin the K4LCN board for the appropriate LCN node address All jumpers on the LCN I O circuit board must be removed if the LCN address is selected on the K4LCN circuit board If a CLCN A B board is present its configuration switches must be in their zero 0 position As illustrated in Figure 11 1 slide the K2LCN or K4LCN circuit board 11 into s
133. e Module Disassembly Overview Fan failure Check drive status General Preliminary disassembly CAUTION If you are considering disassembling a Winchester Drive Module containing redundant drives you probably were informed by a History Module Status display that a DISKPROB exists because of either a power supply failure or a disk drive failure If the fan assembly has failed the red Fan Alarm LED is illuminated Be sure you request status through the Command Processor to verify the address of the disk that is OF FLINE and that its redundant partner is still OK Refer to Figure 6 2 to find the physical location of the OFFLINE drive then disassemble that Winchester Drive Module and remove its slide tray assembly using the procedures that follow The item numbers referred to in this section are keyed to ballooned numbers in Figure 6 1 The item numbers are also used in Section 9 WREN Type History Module Assembly and Section 12 Spare Parts Figure 6 2 Redundant Drive Positioning and Address Assignments Drive 5 Drive 2 Drive 3 Address 5 Address 5 Address 3 Drive 2 Drive 4 Drive 4 Address 2 Address 4 Address 4 Redundant Single Drives Redundant Dual Drives er Remove the front cover by turning the two quarter turn fasteners and freeing the cover tabs from the chassis slots CAUTION DO NOT REMOVE POWER UNTIL INSTRUCTED IN THE STEPS THAT FOLLOW 12 02
134. e Service 51 3 5 2 Dual Disk Drives Configuration Overview SCSI bus termination modules In the nonredundant dual drive configuration both drives are mounted on the right hand primary Winchester Drive Tray and labeled Drive 5 and Drive 3 as illustrated in the Figure 3 9 Drive 5 the front mounted drive is pinned configured for SCSI bus address 5 and Drive 3 the rear mounted drive is pinned configured for SCSI bus address 3 Pinning of the drives is discussed in subsection 9 4 2 Figure 3 9 Nonredundant Dual Drive Configuration 6 laz Drive 3 Termination Drive 3 Modules Drive 5 Nonredundant Dual Drives 12820 As illustrated in Figure 3 9 SCSI bus termination modules must be installed on the bottom of the front mounted 210 megabyte and 445 megabyte drives which is at the end of the SCSI bus printed flex circuit Drive 5 Internal bus terminators must be enabled on the 875 megabyte and 1 8 gigabyte drives by pinning configuration The other end of the SCSI bus is terminated by resistors on the WDI circuit board that are activated when the left hand Winchester Drive Tray is not present The drive mounted in the rear position must not have bus termination modules installed on it See subsection 9 4 2 for detailed installation information Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 52 3 5 2 Dual Disk Drives Configuration continued SPC to driv
135. e drives fails its unimpaired partner can assume operational responsibility until the failed drive can be repaired or replaced The redundant drive configurations that are illustrated in Figure 9 28 have a few physical characteristics that are different from the conventional nonredundant configurations The differences are presented in the following subsections Figure 9 28 Redundant Drive Positioning and Address Assignments Drive 5 Drive 2 Drive 3 Address 5 Address 5 Address 3 Drive 2 Drive 4 Drive 4 Address 2 Address 4 Address 4 Redundant Single Drives Redundant Dual Drives 16776 12 02 History Module Service 202 9 6 1 Single Drive Installation Overview The redundant single drive configuration is very similar to the dual drive configuration The differences are in address pinning SCSI bus termination and cabling 9 6 1 1 Single WREN III Drive Pinning Single drive pinning In the redundant single drive configuration each drive is housed in a separate Winchester Drive Module The terminator resistor module must be removed from both drives As illustrated in Figures 9 29 and 9 30 Drive 5 is mounted in the front position on the tray assembly in the upper module module 2 and has a SCSI bus address of 5 Address 5 is selected by placing Drive Select Plugs in the 2 and 0 positions In binary arithmetic 2 20 4 1 5 decimal Drive 4
136. e positions of the configuration jumpers on the drives If necessary reposition the jumpers e The SCSI Address J5 jumper block must have jumpers installed in positions 1 and 3 for correct addressing e The Option Select J2 jumper block must have a jumper installed in position 5 to enable data parity checking The internal SCSI bus terminators on the drive must not be enabled e The SCSI Address Remote J6 jumper block must not have any jumpers installed on it e The SCSI Address J5 jumper block must have a jumper installed in position 3 for correct addressing e The Option Select J2 jumper block must have a jumper installed in position 5 to enable data parity checking The internal SCSI bus terminators on the drive must not be enabled e The SCSI Address Remote J6 jumper block must not have any jumpers installed on it The internal SCSI bus terminators on either drive must not be enabled Bus termination is provided at the drive end of the SCSI bus cable by a bus terminator card Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 221 9 7 1 3 Single 875 MB Drive Pinning continued Nonterminated 875 Figure 9 42 illustrates the jumper selections for the 875 MB drive MB Drive 5 jumper 51196680 100 when configured as a nonterminated Drive 5 block selections 51196680 100 Figure 9 42 Nonterminated 875 MB Drive 5 51196680 100 Jumper Block Selections Bottom View SCSI Addre
137. e power supply An extractor lever 8 used to both lock the tray in place in the Winchester Disk Assembly and assist in extracting the tray when it is in place The SCSI cable is terminated by a termination modle attached to the drive end of the SCSI interface cable 12 02 History Module Service 284 11 4 2 Winchester Disk Drive Replacement Introduction Disk drive SCSI bus termination T39175LW hard disk drive pinning A Dual Logical WDA hard drive tray can be used to replace the older WDA drive tray that has 8 75 MB or 1 8 GB drives Because it is always a single drive tray that is partitioned into dual drives it is a direct replacement for single and dual drive redundant and non redundant drive trays When replacing a Seagate ST39175LWDrive with a new one it must be pinned exactly like the old one The SCSI cable is terminated by a termination module attached to the drive end of the SCSI interface cable The drive has a self locking protective mechanism that is activated when power is removed from the drive However the drive must be handled with care The SCSI cable is terminated by a termination module attached to the drive end of the SCSI interface cable Figure 4 4 is an illustration of the partitioned Winchester ST39175LW hard disk drive The SCSI address pinning is 5 for the primary drive tray or 4 for the redundant Drive tray Continued on next page 12 02 History Module S
138. e so it can make a 90 turn up to the drive connector as illustrated in Figure 9 33 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 206 9 6 1 2 Single WREN IlI Drive Cabling continued Redundant WREN III drive cable installation front view Figure 9 32 Redundant Single WREN III Drive SCSI Bus Cable Installation Front View 51195180 Card Guide 51195178 Bus Terminator Locate Approximately as Shown Electronics Module Shown for Reference Front View Front Cover and Slide Assembly Omitted for Clarity 2101 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 207 9 6 1 2 Single WREN III Drive Cabling Continued Redundant WREN III drive cable installation top view Figure 9 33 Redundant Single WREN III Drive SCSI Bus Cable Installation Top View Locate Approximately as Shown Winchester Drive 5 Top View 51195180 Card Guide 51195178 Bus Terminator 16773 12 02 History Module Service 208 9 6 2 Dual Drive Installation Overview The redundant dual drive configuration consists of pairs of WREN III drives mounted on separate slide out tray assemblies in separate Winchester Drive Modules They are configured so that one tray assembly which might contain a failed drive can be removed while the system continues to function with the redundant pair of drives on the other tray assembly 9 6 2 1 Dual WREN
139. e subsection 9 4 2 for detailed installation information Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 50 3 5 1 Single Disk Drive Configuration continued SPC to drive tray interconnections Figure 3 8 illustrates the components and interconnections between the SPC circuit board and the right hand primary Winchester Drive Tray The left hand Winchester Drive Tray is not present Figure 3 8 Nonredundant Single Drive Interconnections Slot 2 Front Special Peripheral Controller SPC Board Backplane Connector SPCIl I O Board Slot 2 Rear Slot 5 Rear WDI I O Board jo SSSR Ss Sasa SH S5S A Sees Backplane Connector lt Slot 5 Front Winchester Drive Interface WDI Board irae ads bse a bo t Bus Terminators Secondary Not Present Flex Circuit Drive 5 Front Disk Drive Bus Terminators 1 l l i i SCSI Bus I l i l l Primary l l l l l Printed l l l l l i Right Hand Winchester Drive Tray 1 1 l l L l li L l li L li L L l L L l a Left Hand Tray ty li LE l li L l li LE l l LE l li l I I a ee jaa a ma at am Sa fea aia a m ae i cs ee Pie a ee Ging oe et pa a Gai ae a a a 12 02 History Modul
140. e system always use the Universal Station to select the failed node from the History Module Status display and perform a SHUTDOWN command For a redundant drive system place the drive s off line on the Winchester Drive Tray to be removed Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 151 8 1 Overview Continued Before proceeding Before proceeding IF the failure is in SHUT DOWN then go to The electronics and auxiliary components with a failure in the fan assembly the power supply or in a circuit board Subsection 8 2 The Winchester Disk Assembly with a failure of a drive and the History Module is not configured for redundancy because only the right hand Winchester Drive Tray exists Subsection 8 3 IF the failure is in DO NOT SHUT DOWN but go to The Winchester Disk Assembly with a failure of a drive and the History Module is configured for redundancy because both Winchester Drive Trays have one or two drives Subsection 8 3 Now go to the appropriate subsection for disassembly instructions 8 2 History Module Disassembly Overview Refer to the Five Ten Slot Module Service manual for any additional disassembly procedure assistance To protect the equipment from voltage transients and ensure reliable operation always place the power supply ON OFF switch in the OFF position before removing or replacing the circuit boards power suppl
141. e the information you have learned here Note If you have redundant drives this report is also generated when an error occurs in the synchronization On line data is being copied to the off line drive DRIVE n in the message signifies which of the redundant drives is faulty See the special disassembly assembly procedures for redundant drives Also a Status Detail message will be generated giving the volume name file name sector address and error type Message Note were recommendation OFF LINE if both control tracks lost HM np WENT OFLN NO FUNCTIONS LOST LOST 1 CTL TRACK The above message is a system status change event not a maintenance recommendation as all the others At the same time the following message appears as a maintenance RUN HVTS BAD SECTOR WINCH DISC DRIVE n HM DISK ERROR SECTOR xxxx Of HM DISK SET There has been a Control Track error Since each drive has two Control Tracks for redundancy the second Control Track should have kept your data intact and you should still be operational on the second track You should be able to go back on line If both Control Tracks are lost the drive will be placed off line and must be replaced You cannot go back on line Neither track has a fixed location on the disk and can possibly be repaired by reassignment or initialization Use the recovery procedure in either subsection 5 3 8 or 5 3 9 This is a serious error but you are probably still op
142. e tray interconnections Figure 3 10 illustrates the components and interconnections between the SPC circuit board and the right hand primary Winchester Drive Tray The left hand Winchester Drive Tray is not present Figure 3 10 Nonredundant Dual Drive Interconnections Slot 2 Front Special Peripheral Controller SPC Board Backplane Connector SPCII I O Board Slot 5 Rear WDI I O Board SSS SSeS SSS SSS SS SSS e Backplane Connector Slot 5 Front Winchester Drive Interface WDI Board ress eS Y i O Pl SRE E E ET Slot 2 Rear Bus Terminators u Secondary WI Drive 3 Rear Disk Drive 11 SCSI Bus Left Hand Tray 11 Printed Not Present 11 Flex Circuit Drive 5 Front Disk Drive Bus Terminators Primary Right Hand Winchester Drive Tray Fa a a a a il se ee ef ay fe fe fe fa es ee se 12 02 History Module Service 53 3 6 Redundant Drives History Module Configurations Overview What is redundancy Redundancy drive synchronization Drive maintenancewith redundancy The History Module is capable of supporting redundant Winchester Disk drives that are configured as backups for single or dual drives The additional redundant Winchester Disk drive s is mounted on the left hand secondary Winchester Drive Tray that is installed in the Winchester Disk Assembly The term redundancy is used to describe
143. ear of the History Module chassis are interconnected by two SCSI bus ribbon cables 10 The friction fit connections are released by pulling outward on the individual connectors Do not pull on the ribbon cable itself The Local Control Network LCN trunk cables A and B connect to the LCN I O CLCN A B circuit board 7 in slot 1 at the rear of the History Module chassis by coaxial T connectors Do not disconnect the cables from the T connectors Disconnect only the T connectors from the board connectors Removal of an LCN trunk cable connector from its T connector interrupts the continuity of the network Note where cables A and B connect They are color coded yellow A and green B Do not cross the cable connections The K2LCN 11 or K4LCN 11 and SPC 12 circuit boards are removed by simultaneously pulling outward on the board extractors located on each side of the board and sliding the board out of the History Module chassis The I O circuit boards LCN I O CLCN A B 7 and SPCI I O SPC2 8 and the WDI I O WDI 9 are located at the rear of the History Module chassis in the module s I O card cage They are assigned to slots 1 2 and 5 respectively The circuit boards are removed by simultaneously pulling outward on the board extractors located on each side of the board and sliding the board out of the I O card cage 12 02 History Module Service 155 8 2 5 Winchester Disk Assembly Removal Desc
144. ecking O TP Termination Power 21 0 PTP vn Address 3 12 02 History Module Service 171 9 4 3 Single Dual WREN Ill Drive Cabling Overview Avoid the fan blades Single drive cabling The single SCSI bus ribbon cable from the SPC I O circuit board in the I O card cage on the electronics module passes through a slotted hole in the back of the Winchester Drive Module above the electronics module and routes over the slide tray assembly to the drive If it is a single drive History Module the cable ends at the drive If it is a dual drive History Module the cable exits the lower Winchester Drive Module module 1 and then enters the upper Winchester Drive Module module 2 where it connects to the drive in the module The SCSI bus cable always connects to a WREN III drive with the red stripe at the right side of the drive as you face the connectors on the drive Use special care to prevent the ribbon cables from interfering with the rotating fan blades in the fan assembly The cable can be placed under the WREN III drive to avoid the fan blades Note that the cable is folded under the drive so it can make a 90 turn up to the drive connector Figures 9 8 side view and 9 9 top and front view show the cable routing for a single WREN III drive The drive must have a terminator resistor module installed on it to terminate the end of the SCSI bus cable Figure 9 8 SCSI Cable Routing for Single WREN III Drive Winc
145. ecovery when the sector is known Redundant Drive Data Error Recovery continued It is possible that a defective redundant drive containing a media defect can be reclaimed by running the off line HVTS using Subtest 19 in the SCMD test This test can be configured to do a complete surface READ CHECK and automatically add any bad sectors called defective blocks by HVTS that the test encounters to the existing Bad Sector List called Defect Data List by HVTS A short period of running Subtest 14 will certify the read write capability of the drive A sync operation is required to place the drive on line once the node autoboots with the History Module Operating HMO personality software The History Module must be taken off line to run the HVTS procedure This can be done at a convenient time or the drive can be removed and placed in a less critical History Module to perform the HVTS recovery attempt During the following procedure the History Module remains fully operational running with the redundant backup drive Data errors are most frequently caused by a defective spot on the drive media However an electrical transient can give the very same symptom This procedure recommends first attempting an initialization of the suspect sector writing zeros and reloading the affected data through a SYNCH operation If this does not correct the problem perform the Sector Reassignment function using the
146. ed the text will direct you to the subsection where the specific instructions can be found The item numbers referenced in this subsection are keyed to ballooned numbers shown in Figure 9 1 Figure 9 1 Winchester Drive Module Exploded View 6347 12 02 History Module Service 163 9 3 1 Fan Replacement Procedure Slide the fan assembly 1 into the chassis being careful that the connector at the rear of the unit mates correctly and secure the assembly with the two bale headed fasteners 9 3 2 Power Supply Replacement Procedure Use the following procedure to install the drive power supply on the tray assembly 1 Attach the power supply 4 to the tray assembly with four M4 x 12 mm screws four M4 lock washers and four M4 wide washers as shown in the inset illustration in Figure 9 1 2 Install the wires previously removed from the power supply s terminal block 6 in subsection 5 3 Reconnect the AC power cord 2 9 3 3 Disk Drive Replacement Drive pinning and bus Prepare the disk drive for installation by pinning and if necessary termination installing a data bus terminator resistor module WREN III drive or termination resistor modules 210 MB or 445 MB drives on the replacement drive as required For assistance refer to the subsection that has installation instructions for the particular type of drive e See subsection 9 3 for nonredundant WREN III drive information pinni
147. ed at aa ctese SC eanon coordinate 7A on the board The absence of a jumper is a binary 1 Parity must be an odd number Figure 11 6 K4LCN Board 51402755 100 LCN Node Address Selection NOTE This text is not on the board TS1 Binary Weight M Jumper Removed 1 The overall number of jumpers removed including the parity jumper must be an odd number This example indicates node address 03 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 277 11 2 4 Circuit Board Replacement continued LCN I O board LCN The LCN I O and CLCN A B circuit boards 7 are associated with the node address K2LCN and K4LCN circuit boards and are installed in slot 1 of the rear seleciien card cage as illustrated in Figure 11 1 The LCN I O circuit board must be revision T or higher and must be configured for the appropriate LCN node address as illustrated in Figure 10 7 All jumpers on the K2LCN or K4LCN circuit board must be removed if the LCN address is selected on the LCN I O circuit board Slide the board into the slot until it is fully mated with the backpanel connectors after configuring the board for the appropriate LCN node address Figure 11 7 LCN I O Board LCN Node Address Selection LCN I O BOARD FROM REAR SLOT 2 51107403 100 Binary Weight Jumper Removed 1 P Parity Overall number of jumpers 6 64 omitted including the 5 32 parity jumper must be an odd number This example
148. ed on next page 12 02 History Module Service 227 9 7 1 4 Single 1 8 GB Drive Pinning continued Nonterminated 1 8 GB Drive 5 jumper block selections Figure 9 46 Nonterminated 1 8 GB Drive 5 Jumper Block Selections Bottom View SCSI Bus Address Jumper Block Drive 5 AO Ai A2 Option Jumper Block Drive 5 Nonterminated PWB TE _DS_ ME WP PD SS_TP_TP 16727 B Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 228 9 7 1 4 Single 1 8 GB Drive Pinning continued Nonterminated 1 8 GB Drive 4 jumper block selections Figure 9 47 Nonterminated 1 8 GB Drive 4 Jumper Block Selections Bottom View SCSI Bus Address Jumper Block Drive 4 AO A1 A2 Option Jumper Block Drive 4 Nonterminated PWB 16729 B 12 02 History Module Service 229 9 7 1 5 Single 210 445 875 MB or 1 8 GB Drive Cabling Single drive cabling Ribbon cable red stripe positioning Avoid the fan blades Figure 9 48 illustrates a side view of the cable routing for a redundant single 210 MB 445 MB 875 MB or 1 8 GB drive configuration The single SCSI bus ribbon cable from the SPC I O circuit board that is located in the card cage at the rear of the electronics module passes through a slotted hole in the back of the lower Winchester Drive Module and routes over the slide out tray assembly to Drive 4 The cable then exits the lower Winchester Drive Module and ent
149. eeeeeeneeeetees 51 Nonredundant Dual Drive Configuration ccccceccceseeeeeseeeeeseeseeeeesaees 52 Nonredundant Dual Drive Interconnections cceceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeneeeees 53 Redundant Single Drive Configuration 0 ccccceeeseeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeneees 55 Redundant Single Drive History Module InterconnectionS 0cce 56 Redundant Dual Drive Configuration ccccccsseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeteenees 57 Redundant Dual Drive History Module Interconnections e 58 Dual Drive Type Il Winchester Drive Tray ccccceeeeeseeeeenteeeeeenaeeeeeeaes 61 WDA History Module Non CE Compliant cccccceeeceesseeeeseeeeeneeees 64 WDA History Module CE Compliant 0 cccccescceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 65 WDA History Module Block Diagram 0 cccceeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeeeaaes 66 SCSI Bus and Termination Interconnections c cceeeceeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 68 Nonredundant Dual Drive Configuration ccccceecceseeeeeteeeeeseeteeeeesees 70 Nonredundant Dual Drive Interconnections ceccceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeneeeees 72 Redundant Dual Drive Configuration 0 ccccccseeeeeeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 74 Redundant Dual Drive History Module Interconnections 75 History Module Troubleshooting FIOWChart ceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 81 WREN Ill 210 445 875 MB and 1 8 GB Drive c
150. eeeeseeeesaeeeeaaesseneeenaees 235 10 2 2 Fan Assembly Replacement ccccecsceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeneaeeeeeenaeeeeneaas 236 10 2 3 Power Supply Replacement ccccesceceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeeeaeseeeeeeaas 236 10 2 4 Circuit Board Replacement 0 ccccccsccceececeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeesnaeeeeeeesaees 237 10 2 5 Cabling Replacement ccccccesseeceeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeaeeseeeeeseaeeesaeseneeeenaees 246 10 2 6 Winchester Disk Assembly Replacement sssssssessssssresssrrssrsrrssrrrrssrrrnssns 247 10 3 Winchester Disk Assembly Reassembly ccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeees 248 10 4 Winchester Drive Tray Assembly ssssssssesessssirsssrrssrirrssrirrnsrtrnssrnnnssnns 249 10 4 1 General Information cccccceeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeseaeeseneeseeeeeseaeeesaeeseneeteaes 249 10 4 2 Winchester Disk Drive ReplaceMent ceeeceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 251 SECTION 11 DUAL LOGICAL WDA HISTORY MODULE ASSEMBLY 00 267 11 1 OVERVICW Seo y sc Scneteee ss Bic eet ee ARs eet i 22 eR E RS 267 11 2 History Module Assembly c cccceeecceceseeceeeeeeeceeeeneeceeeenseeeeeeneneeeeenines 269 11 2 1 General Assembly eaa aaiae iai eaaa a iaai a aaa Snai Daas 269 11 2 2 Fan Assembly Replacement cccccccceesseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeensneeeeennes 270 11 2 3 Power Supply Replacement cccecceceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeesaeeeeeeeeas 270 11 2
151. embly until the power supply is fully mated with the backpanel connectors 12 02 History Module Service 270 11 2 4 Circuit Board Replacement Correct circuit board pinning Smart Peripheral Controller SPC circuit board CAUTION AII circuit boards used in the History Module contain electrostatically sensitive devices Use a personnel grounding strap and grounded work surfaces equipment Store and transport the parts only in electrostatically safe containers When replacing an SPC circuit board that was removed from the History Module be sure the address pinning TS1 on the replacement board matches the removed board Do not attempt to duplicate the revision pinning TS2 Verify the selection of the pinning jumpers on the TS1 module on the Smart Peripheral Controller SPC circuit board 12 as illustrated in Figure 11 2 The revision pinning on the TS2 module has been determined in the factory and must not be changed in the field Inspect the Smart Peripheral Controller circuit board for the proper firmware revision It must be revision G or a later revision The two firmware EPROMsSs are located approximately at coordinates 18F and 18G as illustrated in Figure 11 2 If replacement is required note the orientation and location of the EPROMs 0928 101 and 0928 102 before removal Be sure to wear an ESD wriststrap that is properly grounded Remove the EPROMs and replace them Change the firmware revision o
152. en shown in Figure 5 10 It is the same as the previous screen except that it asks you to verify that the data entered is correct and provides two additional targets YES and NO After you have verified that the data is correct select the YES target The system will output one of the following three status messages on the Status Detail display DISK y DISK y DISK y y SECTOR zzzzzz HAS BEEN INITIALIZED y SECTOR zzzzzz HAS BEEN REASSIGNED DATA RECOVERED R y SECTOR zzzzzz HAS BEEN REASSIGNED DATA NOT RECOVE RED If the message indicates that the data was recovered you do not have to reload the file that contained the error If the error DEVICE IN USE ACCESS DENIED 14 occurs do the following 1 Set the suspect drive OFFLINE and if dual drives exist on the same drive tray set the other drive OFFLINE also Cycle the power to the drive tray 3 Repeat Steps 1 through 6 in Table 5 24 Perform a syncH command to restore all drives to service 12 02 History Module Service 114 5 3 13 Sector Initialization Reassignment Procedure Continued Engineering Personality Main Menu display SMCC Main Menu display The Engineering Personality Main Menu display is illustrated in Figure 5 7 Figure 5 7 Engineering Personality Main Menu Display 27 Jul 91 06
153. ent Assembly procedure Slide the fan assembly 3 into the chassis being careful that the connector at the rear of the assembly mates properly Secure the fan assembly with the two fasteners 10 2 3 Power Supply Replacement Assembly procedure Be sure the power supply s ON OFF switch is in the OFF position Slide the power supply 2 into the module until it begins to mate with its backpanel connectors Then press on the extractor levers located on each side of the assembly until the power supply is fully mated with the backpanel connectors 12 02 History Module Service 236 10 2 4 Circuit Board Replacement Correct circuit board pinning Smart Peripheral Controller SPC circuit board CAUTION AII circuit boards used in the History Module contain electrostatically sensitive devices Use a personnel grounding strap and grounded work surfaces equipment Store and transport the parts only in electrostatically safe containers When replacing an SPC circuit board that was removed from the History Module be sure the address pinning TS1 on the replacement board matches the removed board Do not attempt to duplicate the revision pinning TS2 Verify the selection of the pinning jumpers on the TS1 module on the Smart Peripheral Controller SPC circuit board 13 as illustrated in Figure 10 2 The revision pinning on the TS2 module has been determined in the factory and must not be changed in the field In
154. eplacement ccccccceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeseaeeseeeenaes 9 3 3 Disk Drive Replacement oscinina anii n aA aA 9 3 4 Slide Tray ASSOMDIY sesceceveacctestlovet feetaveeesticevcteedleactusivenlhc yintcersestentavestgbeze 9 4 Nonredundant WREN III Drive Installation 9 4 1 Smart Peripheral Controller SPC and SPC I O Boards eeeee 9 4 2 Single Dual WREN III Drive Pinning ccccceeeeeeceseeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeeeees 9 4 3 Single Dual WREN III Drive Cabling cccccceesseceseeeeeeeseteeeeaeeeeeeeees 9 5 Nonredundant 210 445 875 MB and 1 8 GB Drive Installation 9 5 1 Smart Peripheral Controller SPC and SPC I O Boards eceee 9 5 2 Single Dual 210 MB Drive Pinning cccccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeaeeeeeeeees 9 5 3 Single Dual 445 MB Drive Pinning 2 ccccceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeaeeeeeeeees 9 5 4 Single Dual 875 MB Drive Pinning cccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeeeeees 9 5 5 Single Dual 1 8 GB Drive Pinning ccccccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeeeeees 9 5 6 Single Dual 210 445 875 MB or 1 8 GB Drive Cabling ceeeeee 9 6 Redundant WREN III Drive Installation ccc ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 6 1 Single Drive Installation ccccccceeeeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeaeeeeeeeee 9 6 1 1 Single WREN III Drive Pinning c ccecseceeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeesaeeeeeeeees 9 6 1 2 S
155. equipment Store and transport parts only on electrostatically safe containers 12 02 History Module Service 127 7 2 2 Fan Assembly Removal Removal procedure Remove the fan assembly 3 by turning the two fasteners and sliding the assembly out of the chassis The individual fans are not a replaceable item so the complete assembly must be replaced at the Optimum Replaceable Unit ORU level 7 2 3 Power Supply Removal Removal procedure Release the power supply 2 by simultaneously pulling outward on the extractor levers located on each side of the assembly Slide the power supply out of the History Module chassis after it has been released from its backpanel connectors The circuit board in the power supply is not a replaceable item so the complete assembly must be replaced if the board has failed 12 02 History Module Service 128 7 2 4 Circuit Board Removal Cable removal SCSI bus ribbon cables LCN coax cables K2LCN or K4LCN and SPC circuit boards O circuit boards Disconnect those cables necessary for the removal of the associated circuit board assembly Three I O circuit board assemblies have cables connected to them the SPCII I O SPC2 WDI I O WDD and LCN I O CLCN A B The SPCII I O SPC2 circuit board 8 and the WDI I O WDD circuit board 9 located in slots 2 and 5 respectively at the rear of the History Module chassis are interconnected by two SCSI bus ribbon
156. er TAC engineers can often help isolate hardware failures and procedural errors Additionally they have ready access to Shipping Alerts Product Release Notices and problem histories that can help identify the source of a problem You may wish to call TAC to confirm a diagnosis you have made You should always call TAC if these troubleshooting procedures cause you to reach a dead end or an illogical end result 5 3 Troubleshooting Overview The troubleshooting subsection provides an orderly method of diagnosing a problem Preliminary checks are suggested followed by sequential troubleshooting procedures Repair methods are suggested 5 3 1 Preliminary Checks Overview Remove the front panel Check the power supply indicators Check the fan assembly indicator Check the circuit board indicators Before becoming deeply involved in a problem perform some preliminary checks Most of the checks in the steps that follow can be made by observation without removing power from the History Module Unless an indicator observed in these steps clearly points to a repairable problem for example a red LED on the fan assembly power supply or a circuit board leave power applied and go to subsection 5 3 2 where the status errors on displays are interpreted Remove the front panel of the History Module Check the green LED on the power supply If it is not lit place the AC power switch in the OFF position and t
157. er the drive must be handled with great care CAUTION Do not attempt to remove a drive s mating connectors until the screws attaching the drive to the Winchester Drive Tray have been removed To avoid excessive stress and possible damage to the SCSI printed flex circuit keep the tray and the drive together as an assembly until the drive s mating connectors are removed Gently place the tray in an inverted position prior to removal of the drive Loosen and remove the three Phillips head screws on the bottom portion of the tray that attach the drive to the tray Holding the drive in place on the tray place the tray in an upright position The power and SCSI printed flex circuit connectors are friction mated with their respective connectors on the drive Separate the drive s SCSI connector from its mating printed flex circuit SCSI connector by gently prying them apart using a small screwdriver or similar tool The drive must be moved away from the printed flex circuit SCSI connector to prevent damage to the printed flex circuit Do not attempt to move the printed flex circuit SCSI connector away from the drive s connector Separate the power connector from its mating drive power connector Do not pull on the power cable itself but on the connector only You can now remove the drive from the tray If two drives are being replaced follow the same procedure for removal of the second drive Continued on next page
158. er Drive Trays can be removed while power is applied to the History Module because each has a power ON OFF switch Always follow proper ESD Electrostatic Discharge procedures when handling circuit boards or other electronic components 12 02 History Module Service 126 7 2 1 General Disassembly CAUTION Preliminary Figure 7 1 CAUTION Allow at least a 30 second drive spin down time before attempting to remove a Winchester Drive tray If a drive is jarred while its disks are spinning there is head crash potential Disassemble the module only to the extent necessary to repair or replace a defective assembly or part The item numbers referenced in this section are keyed to ballooned numbers in Figure 7 1 These item numbers are also used in Section 8 WDA Type History Module Assembly and Section 10 Spare Parts Figure 3 1 is another view of the History Module assembly Remove the front panel 1 by turning the two quarter turn fasteners at the right side of the panel and swinging the panel outward until free from the chassis slots Place the power switch on the power supply 2 in the OFF position and verify that all indicators on the power supply are extinguished WDA History Module Exploded View 6761 exon CAUTION Many of the assemblies used in this module are likely to contain electrostatically sensitive devices Use a personnel grounding strap and grounded work surfaces
159. erational unless both control tracks were lost Plan to replace or reformat the disk as soon as your maintenance schedule allows Check for a Detailed Module Error message in subsection 5 3 4 Check the Node Status and Status Detail in subsection 5 3 11 Go to subsection 5 2 6 and use the information gained here and from the available status indicators 12 02 History Module Service 86 5 3 4 SMCC Detailed Module Error Messages Detailed Module Errors display Use the following procedure in Table 5 7 to display error messages Table 5 7 WREN III 210 445 875 MB and 1 8 GB Drive Error Messages Display Procedure Step Action 1 Select the SMCC MAINTENANCE target on the Engineering Main Menu display 2 Select the MODULE ERROR target 3 Select the DETAILED MODULE ERRORS target 4 Enter the node number of the suspect History Module If there has been a drive error the display will be shown and printed in a format similar to the example in Figure 5 2 The example lists SPC Error enclosed in a box The boxes are not actually printed They are for illustration only This is an error detected by the software in its exchange with the SPC circuit board its I O the SCSI bus interface or the drive s Figure 5 2 WREN III 210 445 875 MB and 1 8 GB Drive Detailed Module Errors Display Error Severity Error Breakdown Primary Code Secondary Code Device_Numbe
160. erefore in the procedure you will be directed to save as much data as possible In some cases much can be saved In other cases very little or nothing can be accessed It depends on the specific failure and where it is located Careful observation of the displays is required to obtain a list of good and unrecovered volumes files Use the printer output if available Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 97 5 3 8 Nonredundant Drive Data Error Recovery continued Loading the Use the procedure in Table 5 13 to load the personality If the HMI personality software personality software is available on the History Module you can do a personality change directly by selecting the LOAD DUMP target on the History Module Status display If this is the case skip Step 1 it is not necessary to shut down the node to do a personality change Table 5 13 History Module Personality Loading Procedure Step Action 1 Perform a node shutdown of the History Module See the text above 2 Load the HMI personality into the History Module 3 Attempt to save as much data as possible using the BACKUP function Keep detailed records of which volumes files were recovered and which must be reloaded from an alternate known good source Attempt to save Continuous History files Keep detailed records of which volumes files were recovered and which were lost Load HVTS and run the SCMD test using Subtest
161. ers in positions AO and A2 for correct addressing The Option Select J2 jumper block must have a jumper in position TE to enable the SCSI bus terminators on the drive and a jumper between the two TP positions to enable power from the SCSI bus for the bus terminators Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 193 9 5 5 Single Dual 1 8 GB Drive Pinning continued Terminated 1 8 GB Drive 5 jumper block selections Figure 9 22 Terminated 1 8 GB Drive 5 Jumper Block Selections Bottom View SCSI Bus Address Jumper Block Drive 5 AO A1 A2 H HH Option Jumper Block J6 Drive 5 Terminated PWB TE DSME WP PD SS TP_TP e 16726 B Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 194 9 5 5 Single Dual 1 8 GB Drive Pinning continued Dual drive pinning In a dual drive configuration two 1 8 GB drives can be housed in separate Winchester Drive Modules or the same module Drive 5 is mounted in the front position on the tray assembly in the upper module module 2 or the only module and has a SCSI bus address of 5 Figure 9 23 illustrates the location and configuration of the jumper blocks on Drive 5 Use the single drive pinning instructions to properly configure the drive The second drive Drive 3 is mounted in the front position on the tray assembly in the lower module module 1 if there are two modules or the rear position if there is
162. ers the upper Winchester Drive Module where it connects to Drive 5 It then connects to a bus terminator resistor card mounted at the top of the upper Winchester Drive Module chassis The bus terminator resistor card is illustrated in Figure 9 31 A top view of the modules is illustrated in Figure 9 49 The SCSI bus ribbon cable always connects to a drive with the red stripe on the right side of the drive as you face the connectors on the drive Use special care to prevent the ribbon cables from interfering with the rotating fan blades in the fan assembly The cables must be held in place on the tray assemblies by cable clamps to avoid the fan blades The cable is folded so it can make a 90 turn up to the drive connector as illustrated in Figure 9 49 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 230 9 7 1 5 Single 210 445 875 MB or 1 8 GB Drive Cabling Continued Redundant single drive SCSI bus cable routing Figure 9 48 Redundant Single 210 445 875 MB or 1 8 GB Drive SCSI Bus Cable Routing Side View Winchester Drive Module 2 a SCSI Bus Ribbon Cable Slide Tray Assembly Electronics Module SPC I O Connector 16777 SIDE VIEW Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 231 9 7 1 4 Single 210 445 875 MB or 1 8 GB Drive Cabling continued Redundant single drive SCSI bus cable installation Bus Cable Installation Top View Figure 9 49 Redund
163. ervice 285 11 4 2 Winchester Disk Drive Removal continued Winchester _ The locations of the jumper blocks on the drive are illustrated in Figure ST391 as a 11 12 Only the J2 and J5 should have pinning remove any pinning from ea E ee J6 SCSI drive addresses of 4 and 5 are valid addresses Address 5 is the address for the primary drive and 4 is the address for the redundant drive Figure 11 12 Winchester ST39175LW Drive Pinning Address Jumpers One jumper on J2 chown set in position 8 under AS rd eth for ADR 5 all conditions 87654324 Leave this Jumper DRIVE Block on ST39175LW BACK BOTTOM FRONT VIEW OF DRIVE NO JUMPERS ON J5 TOP Front Edge of Drive L KN O00 oh _ ee o e gt cB AE A3 A2 A1 AO BOTTOM J6 TOP Front Edge of Drive Weges ar ooomoo ee gt A3 A2 A1 AO BOTTOM J6 17856 12 02 History Module Service Section 12 Startup 12 1 Overview Section contents The topics covered in this section are Topic See Page 12 1 Overview 311 12 2 Visual Checks 311 12 2 1 WREN Type History Module 311 12 2 2 WDA Type History Module 312 12 3 Power on Procedure 313 12 3 1 Component Replacement Startup 314 12 3 2 Nonredundant Drive Replacement Startup 316 12 3 3 Redundant Drive Replacement Startup 318 12 4 Redundant Disk Drive Data Synchronization 318 12 5 Winchester Disk Drive Formatting 320 12 5 1 Drive Formatting Procedure 321 Pur
164. es Active Passive Termination Jumper Block 1234567 8 5 Vdc 5 Volts Return 12 Volts Return 12 Vdc 12507 A Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 183 9 5 3 Single Dual 445 MB Drive Pinning continued 445 MB drive with terminator modules Figure 9 16 Bottom View of 445 MB Drive with SCSI Bus Terminator Modules Installed 12492 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 184 9 5 3 Single Dual 445 MB Drive Pinning Continued Dual drive pinning In a dual drive configuration two 445 MB drives can be housed in separate Winchester Drive Modules or the same module Drive 5 is mounted in the front position on the tray assembly in the upper module module 2 or the only module and has a SCSI bus address of 5 Figure 9 15 illustrates the location and configuration of the jumper blocks on Drive 5 Use the single drive pinning instructions to properly configure the drive Termination resistor modules must be installed on Drive 5 as illustrated in Figure 9 16 The second drive Drive 3 is mounted in the front position on the tray assembly in the lower module module 1 if there are two modules or the rear position if there is a single module and has a SCSI bus address of 3 Also note the location of the jumpers on the Active Passive Termination jumper block Figure 9 17 illustrates the location and configuration of the jumper bl
165. es are pinning housed in separate Winchester Drive Modules As illustrated in Figure 9 7 Drive 5 is mounted in the upper module module 2 and has a SCSI bus address of 5 Address 5 is selected by placing Drive Select Plugs in the 2 and 0 positions In binary arithmetic 22 29 4 1 5 decimal Be sure that a terminator resistor module is installed on the drive The second drive Drive 3 is mounted in the lower module module 1 and has a SCSI bus address of 3 Address 3 is selected by placing Drive Select Plugs in the 1 and 0 positions In binary arithmetic 2 29 2 1 3 decimal Be sure that the terminator resistor module is removed from the drive In the dual drive configuration the SCSI bus cable from the SPC I O card connects first to Drive 3 and then to Drive 5 For this reason no terminator resistor module should be installed on Drive 3 The termination must be located at the end of the SCSI bus cable on Drive 5 Each drive must also have a jumper in the locations marked P Parity Checking and TP Termination Power Figure 9 7 Dual WREN III Drive Configuration and Termination Nonredundant Rear View Dual Drive 5 Nonredundant Set Jumpers as Shown for Correct System Address Keep Terminator eee in Drive 5 Rear View Dual Drive 3 OO000 Nonredundant O s Oo HAK Remove Terminator E P TP from Drive 3 Drive Select Jumpers oO 2 1 0 Octal Address on SCSI Bus O P Parity Ch
166. es are color coded with cable A coded yellow and cable B coded green The connections to the LCN CLCN A B I O circuit board 7 located in slot 1 of the module s rear card cage are made with tee connectors Connect the LCN trunk cables noting the identification labels and color codes on the cables Match the cables to the proper connector on the LCN I O circuit board Do not cross connect the cable connections 12 02 History Module Service 246 10 2 6 Winchester Disk Assembly Replacement WDA replacement As illustrated in Figure 10 1 the Winchester Disk Assembly 4 occupies slots 4 and 5 in the History Module chassis Figure 10 9 is an illustration of the assembly The Winchester Disk Assembly connectors mate with the backpanel connectors in the slot 5 position but is guided into position by the circuit board guide rails for the slot 4 position Grasping the metal partition dividing the tray compartments with the tray s disengaged or removed is a convenient way of inserting the assembly into its backpanel connectors The friction of the backpanel connectors tends to hold the assembly in place However two fasteners located toward the front of each side of the assembly secure it in place The fan assembly must be removed to have access for the right hand side fastener Figure 10 9 Winchester Disk Assembly 12 02 History Module Service 247 10 3 Winchester Disk Assembly Reassembly Descripti
167. esnaees 80 5 3 2 Sequential Troubleshooting ccccecececeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseaeeeeneeseeeeens 81 5 3 3 Maintenance Recommendations ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 85 5 3 4 SMCC Detailed Module Error M SSaQ S ccecceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeees 87 5 3 5 Real Time Journal RTJ MeSSAQeS ceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 93 5 3 6 Repair Strategy riiin iain ai alain ieee a ii anans 94 5 3 7 Data Error Recovery Technics and Documentation 0 c sceeeeeeeees 96 5 3 8 Nonredundant Drive Data Error Recovery sssssssrrssseresrrrssrrrresrrrsses 97 5 3 9 Redundant Drive Data Error RECOVELY cceesseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 103 5 3 10 Control Track Error Recovery for Sectors 1 31 cceeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeneeeeees 106 5 3 11 Status Detail Display c ccceccceceseceeeeeceeeeesaeeeeaeeeeeeeeseaeeeseaeeeeaeeseeeeenaees 108 5 3 12 Volume Status Display cccccececceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeseeeeeseeeesaeeseaeeeeaes 110 5 3 13 Sector Initialization Reassignment Procedure cccceeeeeseeeeeteeeeees 113 SECTION 6 WREN TYPE HISTORY MODULE DISASSEMBLY csseceseeeeees 117 12 02 History Module Service 6 1 OVEIVIEW naira eel Meee tiene denied ieee 6 2 Electronics Module Disassembly cccceeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 6 3 Nonredundant Winchester Drive Module Disassembly 6 3 1
168. ess jumpers 12 02 History Module Service 288 12 3 Power on Procedure Overview Power was removed from the History Module A nonredundant drive was replaced A redundant drive was replaced There is a choice of three power on procedures found in the next three subsections The procedure you choose depends upon your situation If power was removed from the History Module to replace a defective circuit board power supply fan assembly or a component that required the removal of power from the History Module use the procedure in subsection 12 3 1 If you are replacing a defective drive in the History Module without a redundant drive follow the procedure in subsection 12 3 2 If you are replacing a defective drive in the History Module with a redundant drive follow the procedure in subsection 12 3 3 12 02 History Module Service 289 12 3 1 Component Replacement Startup WREN type HM Use the procedure in Table 12 1 to restart a WREN type History Module startup procedure after replacing a defective component other than a drive Power was removed from the History Module Table 12 1 Restarting a WREN Type History Module Procedure Component Replacement Step Action 1 In the Winchester Drive Module s place the drive power supply s AC POWER switch in the 1 ON position The green LED on the power supply should be lit Check that the red LED on the fan assembly is not lit Secure the
169. est 21 Parameters Continued Function Parameter Comment UDO COMPARE DATA ERR_DISPLAY UDONT STATUS_DISPLAY BLOCK_SIZE_IN_BYTES 256 REPORT TESTNUMBER PASSNUMBER LOG SCALE 100 12 02 History Module Service 299 12 02 History Module Service 300 Section 13 Spare Parts 13 1 Overview Section contents The topics covered in this section are Topic See Page 113 1 Overview 325 13 2 Replaceable Parts Lists 325 Optimum Replaceable In the parts list Optimum Replaceable Unit ORU items are shown with Unit ORU an asterisk beside the part 13 2 Replaceable Parts Lists Overview Refer to the Five Ten Slot Module Service or Dual Node Module Service manual for ORU part numbers in the electronics module portion of the HM In the parts lists the Optimum Replaceable Unit ORU items are shown by an asterisk beside the listing Where appropriate the item numbers in each parts list correspond to reference numbers in Figure 6 1 or 9 1 for a WREN type History Module and Figure 7 1 for a Type I WDA type History Module or 11 1 for a Type I WDA type History Module Spare parts are listed by the original type of History Module that uses them WREN or WDA Go to the appropriate subsection listing the type of equipment that requires a replaceable part The 210 megabyte 445 megabyte 875 megabyte and 1 8 gigabyte
170. et This provides the Status Detail display for the selected History Module as shown in Figure 5 3 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 108 5 3 11 Status Detail Display Continued Status Detail display For any status indication other than OK one of the following error status messages will be displayed SYNCHRONIZE SOURCE ERROR SECTOR XXXXXXX SYNCHRONIZE DESTIN ERR SECTOR XXXXXXX NON RECOV ERR 1 CTL TRK SECTOR XXXXXXX NON RECOV VVID ERROR SECTOR XXXXXXX volm gt filename ex NON RECOV VVAT ERROR SECTOR xxxxxxx volm gt filename ex NON RECOV FAB ERROR SECTOR xxxxxxx volm gt filename ex NON RECOV SAT ERROR SECTOR xxxxxxx volm gt filename ex NON RECOV PDB ERROR SECTOR xxxxxxx volm gt filename ex RECOV DISK DATA ERROR SECTOR xxxxxxx volm gt filename ex NON RECOV DATA ERROR SECTOR xxxxxxx volm gt filename ex ERROR WITH BOTH CTL TRKS SECTOR xxxxxxx NON RECOV DEVICE ERROR SECTOR xxxxxxx volm gt filename ex DISK CONTROLLER ERROR Refer to the Messages Directory manual for assistance in interpreting the message Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 109 5 3 12 Volume Status Display Volume Status display T
171. eturn 12 Vdc ooo ote oo Cn A 12345678 spd ht 16762 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 258 10 4 2 Winchester Disk Drive Removal continued 875 megabyte drive 51196680 100 SCSI bus termination Unlike the 210 and 445 megabyte drives the 875 megabyte drive 51196680 100 does not accommodate external SCSI bus termination modules on the bottom of the drive Bus terminators are permanently located on the drive s PWB and activated by jumpers on the Option Select J2 jumper block as illustrated in Figure 10 17 The SCSI bus terminators must be enabled on any drive that is mounted in the front position of the Winchester Drive Tray A drive mounted in the rear position on a tray must never have its bus terminators enabled The modules provide end termination for the SCSI bus when the Winchester Drive Tray is present With the tray removed resistor terminators on the Winchester Drive Interface WDD circuit board in the Winchester Dive Assembly provide the bus termination 12 02 History Module Service 259 10 4 2 Winchester Disk Drive Removal continued 875 MB drive 51196680 200 jumper blocks Figure 10 18 is an illustration of the 875 megabyte Winchester drive 51196680 200 showing the locations of the two jumper blocks The jumper blocks should be checked for proper positioning of the jumpers based upon the drive s mounting location on a tray The two jum
172. ever some installations might consider the loss of system data even for a brief time critical to the plant s operation Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 78 5 2 Test Strategy continued Are there redundant drives Are fast load cartridges available Do you have backup copies of the data Review the SMCC messages and the RTJ Are there transient or intermittent problems Does your History Module have redundant drives which allow uninterrupted operation while you service or replace a drive Are fast load cartridges available to reload critical modules if the History Module is disabled Refer to the Engineer s Reference Manual Hopefully you have made backup copies of your data which must be used if a drive has crashed and destroyed data Also you must have previously used a special procedure that was discussed in the Engineer s Reference Manual to backup and restore Continuous History data If Continuous History Data was saved without using this procedure the data cannot be properly copied to a replacement drive Review SMCC Maintenance Recommendation messages and the Real Time Journal RTJ for clues to the failure You may need to refer to the Maintenance Test Operations manual the System Maintenance Guide and the Hardware Verification Test System HVTS manual for reference The problem can be a transient or intermittent problem An autoboot can bring the Hi
173. gical block address 05 Illegal Request 22 Illegal function for device 05 Illegal Request 24 Illegal field in CDB 05 Illegal Request 25 Invalid logical unit number 05 Illegal Request 26 Invalid field in parameter List 06 Unit Attention 29 Power bus device reset 06 Unit Attention 2A Mode select parameter change 0B Aborted 43 Message reject error Command 0B Aborted 45 Select reselect failed Command 0B Aborted 48 Initiator detected error Command 0B Aborted 49 Inappropriate illegal message Command Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 91 5 3 4 SMCC Detailed Module Error Messages Continued Recommended corrective action Analyzing the failure in Figure 5 2 After determining the error source using Table 5 9 use Table 5 10 for the recommended corrective action based on the Sense Key Code Then go to subsection 5 3 6 to determine what to do next Table 5 10 WREN MI 210 445 875 MB and 1 8 GB Drive Recommended Corrective Action Sense Key Recommended Corrective Action 00 No Error No action Information only 01 Recovered No action Recovered from error Error 02 Not Ready Test and or replace the drive 03 Media Error Test the drive and reassign the failed media sectors 04 Hardware Error Replace the drive 05 Illegal Request No action Software error 06 Unit Attention Replace the drive Test the History Module 0B Aborted No action Software error Comm
174. gle Drive Installation 215 Single 210 MB Drive Pinning 215 Single 445 MB Drive Pinning 219 Single 875 MB Drive Pinning 222 Single 1 8 GB Drive Pinning 228 Single 210 445 875 MB or 1 8 GB Drive Cabling 231 Redundant Dual Drive Installation 234 Dual 210 MB Drive Pinning 234 Dual 445 MB Drive Pinning 238 Dual 875 MB Drive Pinning 242 Dual 1 8 GB Drive Pinning 249 Dual 210 445 875 MB or 1 8 GB Drive Cabling 253 Purpose This section describes the assembly of the History Module with major components that includes the circuit boards Winchester disk drive s power supply fan assembly and the module cabling 12 02 History Module Service 161 9 2 Electronics Module Assembly Reference Assembly of the electronics module is described in the Five Ten Slot Module Service or the Dual Node Service manual CAUTION CAUTION Always follow proper ESD Electrostatic Discharge procedures when handling circuit boards and other electronic components 12 02 History Module Service 162 9 3 Overview Reference Winchester Drive Module Assembly The following subsections provide step by step instructions for the mechanical assembly of a Winchester Drive Module containing WREN MW 210 MB 445 MB 875 MB or 1 8 GB disk drives Choose those instructions necessary to reassemble the parts you have disassembled in Section 5 When specific pinning or cabling instructions for a particular type of disk drive are requir
175. he amp HMO and amp LDR volumes from removable media to the History Module CP Fn gt amp HMO gt PN nn gt 9np gt D CP S Fn gt amp LDR gt PN nn gt 9np gt D then autoboot again If the above procedure is not successful go to Table 5 3 Call TAC if the same error is displayed 12 02 History Module Service 84 5 3 3 Maintenance Recommendations Overview Detailed Error Module messages Status and Object Detail displays Check the maintenance messages Maintenance message abbreviations Maintenance recommendation messages can be found in either the Real Time Journal RTJ or the Active Maintenance Journal To read the Active Maintenance Journal select the SMCC MAINTENANCE target from the Engineering Main Menu Then select the ACTIVE MAINT JOURNAL target Some errors will also cause a Detailed Error Module message also under SMCC to be generated Detailed Error Module messages for Winchester disk drives are explained in subsection 5 3 4 If available use the Detailed Error Module message to confirm other error reports Check the node s Status Detail display and the Object Detail Volume Status displays for error messages and additional status information Refer to subsections 5 3 11 and 5 3 12 These two types of displays can provide the best detailed information available to assist in an accurate diagnosis If you still have not found your error compare the RTJ message w
176. he Volume Status display is a two page Object Detail display that shows the status of all the volumes of each drive in the History Module This information is important when troubleshooting and repairing drive problems Volume Status display Use the procedure in Table 5 22 to access the Volume Status displays access procedure Table 5 22 Volume Status Display Access Procedure Step Action 1 Choose any NOTIFICATION line on the Status Detail display as illustrated in Figure 5 4 and the VIEW OBJECT DETAIL target will appear at the bottom of the screen Select the VIEW OBJECT DETAIL target The Volume Status display will appear as shown in Figures 5 5 and 5 6 This is a two page display that presents the status of each of the four possible drives and the status of the volumes stored on each drive Figure 5 4 Status Detail Display Drive Selected 1 01 83 01 01783 01 01783 01 01783 01 01783 01 01783 01 01 83 11 Jun 91 10 12 40 1 STATUS DETAIL DISPLAY FOR NODE 50 DATETIME NOTIFICATION 01 83 00 00 OLSKE_DRIVE 5 DISK_ORIVE 3 I5 NOT PRESENT POWERED OFF CONT_HISTORY FUNCTION IS ONLINE HISTRY_JRNLS FUNCTION IS ONLINE ON_PROC_ANLS FUNCTION IS ONLINE AUTO_CHECKPT FUNCTION IS ONLINE HM_STARTUP FUNCTION IS ONLINE OBJECT COMMENT 00 00 ROLL EDIT NODE DIT OBJECT IEW OBJECT CANCEL HISTORY RIGHT COMMENT COMMENT DETAIL SELECTION DETAIL 7878 Continue
177. he data transferred from to the SPC circuit board or the drive The History Module can crash or some nodes can lockup on data access from the History Module Replace the SPC circuit board Message SFM_NET_TSK exception type 03 06 Detector Code 57 or 70 The drive is unreadable The drive s present Paged Status Word is bad The History Module crashed on the load of INIT The SPC Self Test indicator is Check for power to the drives Replace the SPC circuit board Go to subsection 5 3 7 and run SCMD under HVTS for illuminated each drive Message JSINPR Int1 3090 Int2 YY An inconsistent message None None header received from Node yy Int2 12 02 History Module Service 93 5 3 6 Repair Strategy CAUTION Help from TAC After determining the problem Repair or replace CAUTION When reformatting an 875 megabyte drive 51196680 200 or 1 8 gigabyte drive 51196895 100 you must use a 11 5 or later release of HVTS If you have reached this point without finding an Alphanumeric display or a maintenance recommendation that will help you call TAC for assistance Not only can TAC engineers help isolate hardware failures they can often determine if a procedural error has been committed In addition they have ready access to Shipping Alerts Product Release Notices and problem histories that can help identify the source of a problem Now th
178. he drive s A connector hold back bracket 5 that prevents damage to the printed flex circuit when only the front drive is mounted on the tray The connector hold back bracket is installed to rigidly hold the unused connector in place It is held in place by two Phillips head screws using holes intended for mounting the rear drive The connector attaches to the bracket with two screws A power ON OFF switch 6 to control power from the power supply to the drive s and SCSI bus terminators on the WDI circuit board in the Winchester Disk Assembly When power is removed from the tray SCSI bus terminators are activated on the WDI circuit board in anticipation of the loss of the bus terminators installed on a Winchester disk drive in the tray that is about to be removed Terminators are installed on the drive that is mounted at the front of tray A tray power connector 7 that interfaces to the WDI circuit board in the Winchester Disk Assembly and provides 5 Vdc 12 Vdc and ground return to the drive s from the power supply An extractor lever 8 used to both lock the tray in place in the Winchester Disk Assembly and assist in extracting the tray when it is in place When a Winchester Drive Tray has a single drive the drive is mounted at the front of the tray If the drive is a 210 megabyte or 445 megabyte drive three SCSI bus termination modules must be installed on the drive If the drive is a 875 megabyte or 1 8 gigabyte drive t
179. he internal SCSI bus terminators on the drive must be enabled by jumper block pinning A tray containing dual drives has drives mounted at both the front and rear of the tray Only the front drive must terminate the SCSI bus Refer to subsection 10 4 2 for the pinning and termination information for an individual drive 12 02 History Module Service 250 10 4 2 Winchester Disk Drive Replacement Introduction 210 megabyte drive jumper blocks When replacing a Winchester disk drive it is important that you duplicate all jumper block pinning on the drive Of particular interest is the SCSI bus address device and SCSI bus terminator pinning The replacement drive must be pinned identically If the drive is a 210 megabyte or 445 megabyte drive notice also whether or not SCSI bus termination modules are installed at the bottom of the drive A 210 MB or 445 MB drive mounted at the front of the tray must have three bus termination modules installed A drive mounted at the rear of the tray must not have termination modules installed The drive has a self locking protective mechanism that is activated when power is removed from the drive However the drive must be handled with care Figure 10 13 is an illustration of the 210 megabyte Winchester hard disk drive showing the locations of the various jumper blocks All of the jumper blocks should be checked for proper positioning of the jumpers based upon the drive s mounting lo
180. hen back to the ON position If the green indicator does not illuminate either the power supply is defective power is not being provided to it or there is a output power overload If the red LED indicator on the fan assembly is illuminated the fan assembly is defective It indicates a lack of air flow All the green or yellow indicators on the circuit boards must be lit No red indicators should be lit The Alphanumeric display on the EMPU HMPU HPK2 K2LCN K4LCN circuit board must illustrate the correct LCN node address If the status of the indicators is incorrect go to Table 5 3 12 02 History Module Service 80 5 3 2 Sequential Troubleshooting Overview Use the troubleshooting procedure in Figure 5 1 to help isolate a failure This flowchart assumes the History Module was in an operational state before the error in the flowchart occurred Attempting an autoboot or loading the node will destroy some status information The flowchart then refers you to troubleshooting tables and other subsections in this section of the manual Figure 5 1 History Module Troubleshooting Flowchart Select SYSTEM STATUS Check the HISTORY MODULE status If an autoboot was started it may take up to 15 minutes to complete Otherwise the Once for each HM program has hung Check the Alphanumeric Display at the front of the K2LCN K4LC board Go to Table 4 4 if it doesn t indicate the proper Check the status LCN node n
181. here is a bad spot on the disk surface which must be avoided Repeat the procedure described but instead of initializing the sector in Step 1 reassign the sector to the Bad Sector List using the SMCC Sector Initialization Reassignment function With the Type II drives the sectors are re assigned automatically 12 02 History Module Service 105 5 3 10 Control Track Error Recovery for Sectors 1 31 Overview Redundant drive 5 or 3 has a Control Track error Redundant drive 4 or 2 has a Control Track error The following procedures address Control Track recovery for sectors 1 through 31 on the History Module Both redundant and nonredundant drives are covered in the procedures Use the recovery procedure in Table 5 18 for an error condition in sectors 1 through 31 of the Control Track on drive 5 or 3 Table 5 18 Drive 5 or 3 Control Track Error Recovery Procedure Redundant Drives Step Action 1 For a Control Track error on drive 5 or 3 place its redundant partner drive 4 or 2 respectively OFFLINE by using the appropriate Universal Station display 2 Initialize or reassign the sector containing the error 3 If sectors 1 through 7 on the drive have been initialized or reassigned rewrite the Boot record on the drive 4 Autoboot the History Module twice by cycling power to the History Module Wait for an OK status between the first and second autoboot 5 Synchronize drive 4 or 2
182. hester Drive Module WREN III Drive 5 SCSI Bus Ribbon Cable Terminator Resistor Module Slide Tray Assembly Electronics Module SPC I O Connector SIDE VIEW 1010 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 172 9 4 3 Single Dual WREN Ill Drive Cabling Continued Single WREN IlI drive SCSI cable installation Figure 9 9 Single WREN III Drive SCSI Cable Installation Top View of Chassis Locate lt Approximately as Shown Electronics Module Shown for Reference Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 173 9 4 3 Single Dual WREN Ill Drive Cabling Continued Dual drive cabling Figure 9 10 illustrates a side view of the cable routing for dual WREN III drives Note the cabling is similar to single drive cabling but the cable continues on to the upper Winchester Drive Module module 2 that contains the second WREN MI drive The cable is folded and routed under the drives in the same manner that is illustrated in Figure 9 9 Note the upper module contains Drive 5 while the lower module contains Drive 3 The drive in the upper module must have a terminator resistor module installed on it to terminate one end of the SCSI bus cable Figure 9 10 SCSI Cable Routing for Dual WREN III Drives Winchester Drive Module 2 WREN III Drive 5 Terminator Resistor Module Winchester Drive Module 1 WREN Ill GCSI
183. his section are Topic See Page 4 1 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 5 1 4 6 4 6 1 4 7 Overview 63 Physical Configuration 69 Circuit Board Configuration 71 Nonredundant Drive History Module Configuration 72 Type II Disk DrivesConfiguration 72 Redundant Drives History Module Configuration 75 Type II Disk Drives Configuration 76 Field Adjustments 78 Purpose of the section Purpose of the WDA type History Module This section describes the two possible configurations for the WDA type History Module with Type II Drive Tray s hardware including hardware servicing and replacement The WDA type History Module HM provides mass data storage for history files system software and customer files for the TPS system The WDA History Module is a node on the Local Control Network LCN with a specific address assigned More than one WDA History Module can reside on the network Figure 4 1 Dual Drive Type H Winchester Drive Tray 6768 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 61 4 1 Overview Continued WDA type History Module overview How to use this section Redundant drive configuration Field Adjustments The WDA History Module consists of the electronics necessary to interface to the LCN and the electronics necessary to control one or two 3 5 inch Winchester hard disk drives The WDA History Module is packaged in a Five Slot Module chassis Use this section to
184. his section can be used as an aid when installing the 210 MB 445 MB 875 MB or 1 8 GB drive and associated components in History Modules configured for redundant drives The History Module contains redundant single or dual pairs of drives The drives and associated components are configured by software to accept identical write data If one of the drives fails its unimpaired partner can assume operational responsibility until the failed drive can be repaired or replaced The redundant drive configurations that are illustrated in Figure 9 37 have a few physical characteristics that are different from the conventional nonredundant configurations The differences are presented in the following subsections Figure 9 37 Redundant 210 445 875 or 1 8 GB Drive Positioning and Address Assignments Drive 5 Drive 2 Drive 3 Address 5 Address 5 Address 3 Drive 2 Drive 4 Drive 4 Address 2 Address 4 Address 4 Redundant Single Drives Redundant Dual Drives 16776 9 7 1 Redundant Single Drive Installation 9 7 1 1 Single 210 MB Drive Pinning Overview Redundant single drive configuration is similar in appearance to the nonredundant dual drive configuration The differences are in address pinning SCSI bus termination and cabling Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 214 9 7 1 1 Single 210 MB Drive Pinning continued Single 210 MB drive pinning Drive 5 Drive 4 SCSI bus
185. identify the History Module parts and understand the operation of the WDA History Module Then concentrate on the sections in the manual that meet your needs such as testing troubleshooting disassembly assembly servicing and History Module startup WDA History Modules can be configured as non redundant or redundant When configured for redundant drives data is written to the redundant drives almost simultaneously If one of the drives should fail the redundant partner has the full database intact and can continue to provide normal operation capability until the failed drive is repaired or replaced For more information on redundant drives go to subsection 4 6 There are no field adjustments required for the WDA History Module s electronics or Winchester disk drives 12 02 History Module Service 62 4 2 Description CE Compliance Overview The design of the Five Slot Module chassis and the I O circuit boards that install in the rear card cage has changed for CE Compliance Pertinent information can be found in the Five Ten Slot Service manual Functionally the non CE Compliant and CE Compliant WDA History Modules are the same However the I O circuit boards that install in the rear card cages are not interchangeable because of their physical characteristics Figures 4 2 and 4 3 illustrate the front and rear views of the non CE Compliant and CE Compliant WDA History Modules that can be configured for one oe
186. inchester drive interface Local Control Network interface The History Module requires the connection of two external cable sets to service its two interfaces The interfaces are described below An interface between the SPCII SPC2 I O circuit board 8 located in slot 2 of the History Module s rear card cage and the WDI I O circuit board 9 located in slot 5 of the rear card cage is provided by two 50 pin ribbon cables 10 The interface is the SCSI bus interface between the SPC circuit board 12 and any Winchester disk drives mounted on the Winchester Drive Trays 5 and 6 in the Winchester Disk Assembly The sets of ribbon cable connectors are keyed and friction mate with connectors on the SPCII SPC2 I O and WDI I O circuit boards as illustrated in Figure 11 1 Do not grasp the ribbon cable when making the connection Grasp only the ribbon cable connectors Two coaxial trunk cables A and B provide the interface to the Local Control Network LCN The trunk cables are color coded with cable A coded yellow and cable B coded green The connections to the LCN CLCN A B I O circuit board 7 located in slot 1 of the module s rear card cage are made with tee connectors Connect the LCN trunk cables noting the identification labels and color codes on the cables Match the cables to the proper connector on the LCN I O circuit board Do not cross connect the cable connections 12 02 History Module Service
187. ingle WREN III Drive Cabling ccccceeeececeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeseaeeeseaeeseeeeees 9 6 2 Dual Drive INStallation sistre tiiti eE AE ce cazescvsavesevnaveg ceveamtevnaxtes coves 9 6 2 1 Dual WREN III Drive Pinning ccc eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeteneaeens 9 6 2 2 Dual WREN III Drive Cabling 0 ccccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeceaeeesaeeeeneeteaes 9 6 2 2 Dual WREN III Drive Cabling Continued 0 ccccceceesteeesessteeeseneees 12 02 History Module Service vi 9 7 1 Redundant Single Drive Installation ccccceesseeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeetees 214 9 7 1 1 Single 210 MB Drive Pinning ccccceceeeeeeeeceneeeeeeeeceeeesaeeeeaeeseeeeeeaees 214 9 7 1 2 Single 445 MB Drive Pinning cccceccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeseeeeesaees 218 9 7 1 3 Single 875 MB Drive Pinning ccccccececeeeeeeeceneeeeeeeeseaeeessaeeeeaeeseeeeesaees 221 9 7 1 4 Single 1 8 GB Drive Pinning ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeesaeeesaeeseneeeeaees 227 9 7 1 5 Single 210 445 875 MB or 1 8 GB Drive Cabling cceeeeseeeeeeeeees 230 SECTION 10 WDA TYPE HISTORY MODULE ASSEMBLY ssccsstsseeeeeeeeeeees 233 10 1 OVGIVICW inaandaa a e al eens a a ae aa aoda aa eevee teers eee 233 10 2 History Module Assembly eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeceeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaas 235 10 2 1 General Assembly cccccccececececeeeeeeeeceeeeeceaeeeeaaese
188. ion in the History Module Refer to subsection 11 4 Figure 11 10 Winchester Disk Assembly Exploded View Each tray 3 or 4 is held in place by an extractor lever and by the friction of the tray s mating connectors The tray is removed from the assembly by pulling outward on the tray s extractor lever and sliding the tray out of the chassis The Winchester Drive Interface WDI circuit board 2 is installed with five phillips head screws at the corners and forward center of the board that are accessible through holes at the top of the assembly chassis A 1 27 mm 050 inch spacer washer must be used between the circuit board and the metal chassis at each screw location It is very important that the spacers are used in mounting the board because without the spacers the board will not properly mate with the backpanel connectors Since it is very difficult to install the WDI circuit board using spacers it is recommended that the circuit board not be replaced in the field Instead the Winchester Disk Assembly should be replaced if it is suspected that the circuit board has failed A Winchester Drive Tray 3 or 4 is installed in the assembly by gently sliding it into its compartment until it begins to mate with the WDI board Then firmly apply pressure to the front of the tray until the extractor lever assumes a relaxed position that is parallel to the tray s front panel 12 02 History Module Service 28
189. ions Bottom View Options Jumper Block t Not Used No Jumpers PWB Drive Bottom SCSI Drive Address Jumper Block No SCSI BusTermination Resistor Modules Active Passive Termination Jumper Block PWB O 1234567 8 5 Vdc 5 Volts Return 12 Volts Return 12 Vdc 12504 12 02 History Module Service 220 9 7 1 3 Single 875 MB Drive Pinning Overview ATTENTION Single 875 MB drive configuration jumpers 875 MB Drive 5 51196680 100 875 MB Drive 4 51196680 100 SCSI bus termination Redundant single drive configuration is similar in appearance to the nonredundant dual drive configuration The differences are in address pinning SCSI bus termination and cabling ATTENTION Your History Module will contain one of two types of 875 megabyte drives They are easily identified by their appearance and the Honeywell part number 51196680 100 or 51196680 200 on the drive Be sure that you use the pinning procedure that matches the drive Each drive is housed in a separate Winchester Drive Module The configuration of a History Module with redundant single 875 megabyte drives is illustrated in Figure 9 37 The drives are located in the front positions on the tray assembly in both drive chassis and must be pinned as drive 5 upper drive chassis and drive 4 lower drive chassis as illustrated in Figures 9 42 through 9 45 respectively Note th
190. ircuit board and at the drive end of the SCSI bus cable The actual routing of the SCSI bus ribbon cable for a particular configuration is illustrated elsewhere in this manual If the WREN III drives are installed in a nonredundant drive History Module the SCSI bus terminator module is located on the last drive on the cable When WREN III drives are installed in a redundant drive History Module the SCSI bus termination is located at the physical end of the ribbon cable A bus terminator card is fastened to the top of the upper Winchester Drive Module chassis This arrangement permits a failed drive to be disconnected while power is applied without disturbing its redundant partner on the same SCSI bus A Smart Peripheral Controller SPC circuit board and its associated SPC VO circuit board communicate with the WREN III drives The other board types in the electronics module vary with the module type Five Slot Module or Dual Node Module The functional board complement of the electronics module can also vary with different software releases Refer to the Five Ten Slot Module Service or Dual Node Module Service manual for the board complement that matches your equipment This is an LCN module using standard LCN cabling See the Five Ten Slot Module Service or Dual Node Module Service manual for LCN cabling information Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 22 2 2 1 WREN III History Module Description continued
191. istory Module you can do a personality change directly using the LOAD DUMP target on the History Module Status display If this is the case skip Step 1 It is not necessary to shut down the node to do a personality change Table 5 15 Data Error Recovery Procedure Init Reload Required Step Action 1 Perform a node shutdown of the History Module See the above text 2 Load the History Module Initialization HMI personality software 3 Attempt to save as much History Module data as possible using the BACKUP function Keep detailed records of which volumes files were recovered and which must be reloaded from an alternate known good source 4 Attempt to save Continuous History files Keep detailed records of which volumes files were recovered and which were lost 5 Reassign the bad sector using the SMCC function Initialization of the sector can be attempted in place of reassignment of the sector However a marginal sector can initialize properly and then become as a problem later The recovery process for active file problems requires too much time to implement at this point 6 Initialize the drive 7 Restore the data saved in Steps 3 and 4 to the History Module Procedures for restoring Continuous History data are provided in the Customer Release Guide 8 Load additional volumes files from alternate sources noted in Step 3 History Module data that was not saved noted in Step 4 remains lost
192. ith the samples in subsection 5 3 5 Also if you have not already done so use the printer to make copies of all maintenance messages and System Status Error messages Then compare them with the types of messages shown in subsections 5 3 3 through 5 3 4 and 5 3 11 Abbreviations used in these maintenance recommendation messages are e np Node pair e n Disk drive device number e xxxx Sector number e mmmm Volume name Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 85 5 3 3 Maintenance Recommendations continued Maintenance recommendation message examples in Table 5 6 Some examples of maintenance recommendation messages can be found Table 5 6 Maintenance Recommendation Messages Interpretation Action Message RUN HVTS FAILED SPC CTLR HM NON RECOV CTLR ERROR There has been a failure in the SPC controller The object state is set to FAIL History Module Node Status See Table 5 2 Message INVESTIGATE DEGRADED WINCH DISC DRIVE n HM DISK ERROR SECTOR xxxx There has been a data error either reading or writing drive n You have lost some of your data Check for a Detailed Module Error message See subsection 5 3 4 Check the Node Status and Status Detail See subsection 5 3 11 You may be able to reassign the bad sector Replace the drive if time is valuable and you have a spare Then plan to reformat this drive and use it for a spare Go to subsection 5 3 6 and us
193. ity in megabytes MBs is considerably less The 210 megabyte 445 megabyte 875 megabyte and 1 8 gigabyte Winchester disk drives are small in physical size only 3 1 2 inches but they have a much larger storage capacity than the WREN MI drive The drives formatted capacities where a megabyte is a unit of 1 024 000 bytes are listed in Table 1 1 Table 1 1 Winchester Disk Drive Capacities Drive Type Capacity in Megabytes Single Drives Dual Drives Formatted Formatted WREN IlI 136 90 273 80 210 Megabyte 215 04 430 08 445 Megabyte 454 13 908 26 875 Megabyte 896 04 1792 08 1 8 Gigabyte 1882 93 3765 86 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 16 1 1 Overview Continued Redundant drive configurations Troubleshooting disassembly and assembly History Modules with WREN III 210 445 875 MB or 1 8 GB drives can be assembled in a redundant disk drive configuration The configuration allows software to synchronize a redundant drive with its active primary drive partner in such a way that the same data is written to both drives almost simultaneously If one of the drives fails its partner becomes the active drive until the failed drive is repaired or replaced The design of the redundant disk drive History Module permits power to remain on the active drive s while the failed drive is being replaced The troubleshooting disassembly and assembly procedures
194. ive Chassis Top View DC Power Cable 51303536 061 alin Drive Power Supply Fan Assembly Cable Power Cord 51303549 100 _ E H NTS i Fan Assembly I Drive 5 LULU alia h paa Rear View E E Ses Upper Winchester Drive Chassis Top View DC Power Cable 51303536 061 Note Depending upon the manufacturing date of the History Module an EMPU HMPU or HPK2 could be installed in slot 1 If an HPK2 is installed in slot 1 the SPC and SPC I O circuit boards must be installed in slot 4 because no more than two empty slots can exist between circuit boards 12864 12 02 History Module Service 2 3 Redundant Drive History Modules Overview What is redundancy Redundancy drive synchronization Drive maintenancewith redundancy History Modules are capable of redundant disk drive configurations The additional redundant Winchester disk drive s is located in a second Winchester Drive Module that is stacked above the primary Winchester Drive Module and is physically similar to the WREN III 210 MB 445 MB 875 MB or 1 8 GB Dual Drive configuration that is illustrated in Figures 2 1 and 2 5 The term redundancy is used to describe redundant WREN III 210 MB 445 MB 875 MB or 1 8 GB drives not redundant electronics modules which is the case with other LCN modules Although hard drives are quite reliable the catastrophic nature by which data is lo
195. ive kit includes installation instructions 51196351 100 875 Megabyte Disk Drive kit includes installation instructions 51196720 100 1 8 Gigabyte Disk Drive kit includes installation instructions 51196897 100 Partioned WDA Winchbester Drive Tray 51403366 100 i Dual Logical Drive replacement for 1 8 GB disk drive 51191579 100 Dual Logical Drive replacement for 875 MB disk drive 51191579 200 411 K2LCN 2 Circuit Board with 2 megawords of memory 51402615 200 411 K2LCN 4 Circuit Board with 4 megawords of memory 51402615 400 411 K4LCN Circuit Board 51401946 100 411 4 Megaword Memory Board for K4LCN Board 51401946 100 51201645 400 411 K4LCN Circuit Board 51402755 100 411 4 Megaword Memory Board for K4LCN Board 51402755 100 51201795 400 OF LCN I O Circuit Board 51107403 100 7 CLCN A B Circuit Board CE Compliant 51305072 100 12 Smart Peripheral Controller SPC Circuit Board 51401052 100 ORU Level Replacement Item Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 303 13 2 WDA type History Module parts list Replaceable Parts Lists continued History Module at the service part level Table 13 2 lists part numbers for the Winchester Disk Assembly type continued Table 13 2 WDA Type Drive History Module Parts List Continued Item Description Part Number 8 Smart Peripheral Controller II SPCII I O Circuit Board 51304907 100 8 Smart Peripheral Cont
196. l Assembly Purpose Figure 10 1 This subsection contains instructions for the assembly of the WDA History Module Use those subsections necessary to reassemble the module with parts you removed by following instructions in Section 4 When specific configuration or cabling instructions for a given part or assembly are required notes or special instructions in the text will assist you or reference you to the subsection where those instructions can be found The item numbers used in this section are keyed to ballooned numbers in Figure 10 1 These item numbers are also used in Section 6 WDA Type History Module Disassembly Figures 3 1 and 3 2 is other views of a typical History Module assembly The CE Compliant version is slightly different in appearance WDA History Module Exploded View 6761 CAUTION When assembling the History Module power must be removed from the module either by disconnecting the module s power cord or by placing the power supply s ON OFF switch in the OFF position whichever is applicable The exception is the installation of a Winchester Drive Tray The tray can be installed while power is applied to the module but the tray s ON OFF switch must be in the OFF position when installing the tray However the tray s ON OFF switch must be placed in the ON position immediately after installing the tray 12 02 History Module Service 235 10 2 2 Fan Assembly Replacem
197. lot 1 until it is fully mated with the backpanel connectors after selecting the appropriate LCN node address Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 273 11 2 4 Circuit Board Replacement continued K2LCN Figure 11 3 illustrates LCN node address selection on the K2LCN board 51401551 x00 LCN assembly 51401551 x00 The pinning block TS2 is located at coordinate Agdress Selecto 9C on the board The absence of a jumper is a binary 1 Parity must be an odd number Figure 11 3 K2LCN Board 51401551 x00 LCN Node Address Selection NOTE This text is not on the board Binary Weight Parity Jumper Removed 1 9467 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 274 11 2 4 Circuit Board Replacement continued K2LCN Figure 11 4 illustrates LCN node address selection on the K2LCN board 51402615 x00 LCN assembly 51402615 x00 The pinning block TS1 is located at a serecuon coordinate 7A on the board The absence of a jumper is a binary 1 Parity must be an odd number Figure 11 4 K2LCN Board 51402615 x00 LCN Node Address Selection NOTE This text is not on the board TS1 Binary Weight a Jumper Removed 1 The overall number of jumpers removed including the parity jumper must be an odd number This example indicates node address 03 7739 Continued on next page
198. lustrated in ae block Figure 7 10 Only the Options Select J2 and SCSI Address J6 jumper ocaions blocks should be altered SCSI drive addresses of 2 3 4 and 5 are the only valid addresses Figure 7 10 1 8 Gigabyte Drive Jumper Block Selections Bottom View SCSI Bus Address Jumper Block Option Jumper Block See Address Selection Table Drives 4 and 5 i PWB J2 Option Jumper Block Drives 2 and 3 g PWB TE DSME_WP PD SS TP_TP DC Power O Connector Connector J1 5 Vdc 5 Volts Return 12 Volts Return 12 Vde 16725 A Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 148 7 3 1 Winchester Disk Drive Removal continued 1 8 gigabyte drive SCSI bus termination Unlike the 210 megabyte and 445 megabyte drives the 1 8 gigabyte drive does not accommodate external SCSI bus termination modules on the bottom of the drive Bus terminators are permanently located on the drive s PWB and activated by jumpers on the Option Select J2 jumper block as illustrated in Figure 7 10 The SCSI bus terminators must be enabled on any drive that is mounted in the front position of the Winchester Drive Tray A drive mounted in the rear position on a tray must never have its bus terminators enabled The modules provide end termination for the SCSI bus when the Winchester Drive Tray is present With the tray removed resistor terminators on the Winchester Drive Interface WDD circuit board in the Win
199. mbly WDA that occupies circuit board slots 4 and 5 in the module Only the right hand tray is present for a nonredundant drive configuration Both trays are present for a redundant drive configuration The modules have an enhanced power supply located at the bottom of the module that provides power for the circuit boards the drive s and the fan assembly A fan assembly is located at the right hand side of the module and provides cooling for the circuit boards power supply and the drive s Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 43 3 2 Non CE Compliant WDA History Module Description Continued Figure 3 3 WDA History Module Non CE Compliant Tray Power Switch Fan Assembly SPC K2LCN 2 O FRONT VIEW Power Supply Node Power Switch Reset Button Ribbon Cable WDI I C SPCII I O LCN I O REAR VIEW 6765 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 44 3 2 Description continued Non CE Compliant WDA History Module Figure 3 4 WDA History Module CE Compliant Tray Power Switch Fan Assembly Right Hand Tray Left Hand Tray SPC K2LCN K4LCN O FRONT VIEW Power Supply Node Power Switch Reset Button Ribbon Cable REAR VIEW 16758 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 45 3 2 Description continued WDA History Module block diagram Figure 3 5 is a block diagram of the WDA Hi
200. mination 12 02 History Module Service 143 7 3 1 Winchester Disk Drive Removal continued 875 MB drive 51196680 200 jumper blocks Figure 7 9 is an illustration of the 875 megabyte Winchester drive 51196680 200 showing the locations of the two jumper blocks The jumper blocks should be checked for proper positioning of the jumpers based upon the drive s mounting location on a tray The two jumper blocks must be altered if necessary to accommodate the mounting location of the drive on either a right hand or left hand tray front or rear position These are the Option J2 and SCSI Bus Address J6 jumper blocks Table 7 4 and Figure 7 9 illustrate the proper positioning of the jumpers on each jumper block for the drive s mounting position Table 7 4 875 MB Drive 51196680 200 SCSI Bus Address Selection Drive Tray Location SCSI Bus Address Jumper Position Left Hand Rear 2 Al Right Hand Rear 3 AO and A1 Left Hand Front 4 A2 Right Hand Front 5 AO and A2 Replacement drives are shipped from the factory pinned for a SCSI device address of 5 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 144 7 3 1 Winchester Disk Drive Removal continued 875 megabyte drive The locations of the jumper blocks on the drive are illustrated in Figure 7 51196680 200 jumper 9 The Options J2 and SCSI Address J5 jumper blocks should be plock peanons altered if necessary
201. modules Three SCSI bus termination modules must be installed at the bottom of any Winchester disk drive that is mounted at the front position of the Winchester Drive Tray A drive mounted at the rear position on a tray never has termination resistor modules installed The location and orientation of the modules is shown in Figure 7 7 Be sure that the module orientation is correct The dot on the module that identifies pin 1 and or the part number must be visible It is possible to reverse the orientation of the modules The modules provide end termination for the SCSI bus when the Winchester Drive Tray is present With the tray removed resistor terminators on the Winchester Drive Interface WDD circuit board in the Winchester Dive Assembly provide the bus termination Figure 7 7 Bottom View of 445 MB Drive with SCSI Bus Terminators Pin 1 Dot or Part Number on Top 12492 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 140 7 3 1 Winchester Disk Drive Removal continued ATTENTION 875 MB drive jumper blocks 51196680 100 ATTENTION Your History Module will contain one of two types of 875 megabyte drives They are easily identified by their appearance and the Honeywell part number 51196680 100 or 51196680 200 on the drive Be sure that you use the pinning procedure that matches the drive Figure 7 8 is an illustration of the 875 megabyte Winchester drive 51196680 100 showing the lo
202. must be pinned configured for SCSI bus address 4 The drive in Figure 4 8 labeled Drive 3 is actually the second half of drive 5 The redundant partner labeled Drive 2 is actually the second half of Drive 4 Pinning of the drives is discussed in subsection 11 4 2 Figure 4 8 Redundant Dual Drive Configuration ee ka aiaa kaaa Eaa a a ees E S cadre a at J Up e a genes SPM er a AT Drive 5 Drive 4 w mab lt oO A Driva R SCSI bus termination The SCSI cable for each tray is terminated by a terminator mounted on modules the end of the SCSI cable See subsection 11 4 2 for detailed installation information Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 74 4 6 1 Type ll Disk Drives Configuration continued SPC to drive tray interconnections Figure 4 9 illustrates the components and interconnections between the SPC circuit board and the drives Figure 4 9 Redundant Dual Drive History Module Interconnections Slot 2 Front Smart Peripheral Controller SPC Board Slot 2 Rear SCSI Bus Ribbon Cable Backplane Connector Connector SPCII I O Board Slot 5 Rear WDI I O Board Backplane Connector Slot 5 Front Winchester Drive Interface WDI Board Drive 2 Partition SCSI Cable 51305559 100 Drive 4 Partition Terminato
203. n at the front of the circuit board The SPC Input Output SPC I O circuit board 51304156 100 that interfaces the 210 MB 445 MB 875 MB or 1 8 GB drive has no pinning requirements Figure 9 11 SPC Board Address Pinning for SCSI Bus Address U U L Board Revision Socket DO NOT CHANGE ADDR REV TS1 TS2 a Program TS1 as follows PINS DESCRIPTION 9 8 Always Shorted 10 7 Always Shorted 11 6 Always Shorted 12 5 Always Shorted 13 4 Short WREN III History Module N FN WRUONO 14 3 Open 15 2 Open 16 1 Open Setting for this application SCSI Address 7 for this application 51401052 100 SPC 12544 12 02 History Module Service 176 9 5 2 Single Dual 210 MB Drive Pinning Overview Single drive pinning Use Figures 9 12 and 9 14 to determine the pinning for the nonredundant 210 MB drive s In a nonredundant single drive configuration a single 210 MB drive is mounted in the front position on the tray assembly in one Winchester Drive Module Figure 9 12 illustrates the location and configuration of the jumper blocks on the 210 MB drive The drive must be configured for a SCSI bus address of 5 Also note the location of the jumpers on the Active Passive Termination Terminator Power and Parity Remote Start jumper blocks The SCSI Drive Address jumper block must have jumpers between pins 1 and 2 and pins 5 and 6 for corre
204. n resistor modules installed on it to terminate the drive end of the SCSI bus cable Dual Winchester Drive Modules Figure 9 26 Dual 210 445 875 MB or 1 8 GB Drive SCSI Cable Routing Side View Dual Modules Winchester Drive Module 2 SCSI Bus Ribbon Cable Slide Tray Assembly Electronics Module SPC I O Connector I _ eo OI OO SIDE VIEW 16769 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 200 9 5 6 Single Dual 210 445 875 MB or 1 8 GB Drive Cabling Single Winchester Drive Module Continued Figure 9 27 Dual 210 445 875 MB or 1 8 GB Drive SCSI Cable Routing Side View Single Module Figure 9 27 is an illustration of a nonredundant dual drive configuration when both drives are mounted in a single Winchester Drive Module Winchester Drive Module SCSI Bus Ribbon Cable Slide Tray Assembly Electronics Module SPC I O Connector SIDE VIEW 16770 12 02 History Module Service 201 9 6 Redundant WREN III Drive Installation Overview Drive configurations Use the supplemental information in this subsection when installing WREN III drives and associated components in History Modules configured for redundant drives The History Module contains redundant single or dual pairs of WREN III drives The drives and associated components are configured by software to accept identical write data If one of th
205. n the circuit board Slide the SPC circuit board 12 as illustrated in Figure 11 1 into slot 3 of the module chassis until it is fully mated with the backpanel connectors Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 271 11 2 4 Circuit Board Replacement continued SPC circuit board SCSI bus address pinning Figure 11 2 SCSI Bus Address Pinning on SPC Circuit Board 12554 0928 101 0928 102 NOU BROOD NO Board Revision Socket DO NOT CHANGE Configure TS1 as follows PINS 9 8 10 7 11 6 12 5 13 4 14 3 15 2 16 1 0928 101 REV G 0928 102 DESCRIPTION Always Shorted Always Shorted Always Shorted Always Shorted Short WREN III or WDA History Module Open Open Open Setting for this application SCSI Address 7 for this application ee ASSY No 51401052 100 SPC II SPC2 I O circuit board The SPC II SPC2 I O circuit board 8 is associated with the SPC circuit board and is installed in slot 2 of the rear card cage as illustrated in Figure 11 1 Slide the SPCII I O circuit board into the slot until fully mated with the backpanel connectors There are no pinning requirements on the board Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 11 2 4 Circuit Board Replacement continued LCN address configuration K2LCN circuit board LCN node address selection The LCN node address can be selected on either th
206. nd will either have SCSI bus termination modules installed on it or have internal bus terminators enabled 9466 12 02 History Module Service 48 3 4 Circuit Board Configuration SPC circuit board WDI and WDI I O circuit boards K2LCN or K4LCN and LCN I O circuit boards Circuit board configuration The Smart Peripheral Controller SPC circuit board provides communication with and control of the Winchester disk drives and the SPC I O circuit board The SPC I O circuit board and the Winchester Drive Interface WDI circuit board in the Winchester Disk Assembly with its associated WDI I O circuit board provide the SCSI bus interface between the SPC circuit board and the Winchester disk drives SCSI bus terminators are activated when a Winchester Drive Tray is not present in the WDA or has power removed from it by its power switch Any Winchester Drive Tray that does not have power applied to it must be removed from the WDA The K2LCN or K4LCN circuit board and its associated LCN I O CLCN A B circuit board provide the electronic link between the Local Control Network LCN and the SPC circuit board The K2LCN and K4LCN circuit board contain the node processor and supporting memory For K2LCN K4LCN and LCN I O CLCN A B circuit board configuration information refer to the Five Ten Slot Module Service mionmaton manual as well as subsection 8 2 4 in this manual Configuration of the SPC circuit board is al
207. ng information is in subsection 9 3 2 e See subsection 9 4 for nonredundant 210 MB 445 MB 875 MB or 1 8 GB drive information pinning information is in subsection 9 4 2 or 9 4 3 e See subsection 9 5 for redundant WREN III drive information redundant single drive pinning information is in subsection 9 5 1 redundant dual drive pinning information is in subsection 9 5 2 e See subsection 9 6 for redundant 210 MB 445 MB 875 MB or 1 8 GB disk drive information redundant single drive information is in subsection 9 6 1 redundant dual drive information is in subsection 9 6 2 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 164 9 3 3 Disk Drive Replacement continued WREN Ill drive mounting The WREN III drive requires rubber shock mounts If they appear nonresilient or cracked replacement shock mounts Honeywell part number 51108679 100 are recommended Use either new mounts or salvage the mounts from the failed drive Attach them to the slide out tray assembly as illustrated in Figure 9 2 Orient the drive as illustrated in Figure 9 1 and secure it with four 6 32 x 1 1 4 inch panhead screws four 6 split lock washers and four M3 5 wide washers as illustrated in Figure 9 2 Connect the dc power cable to the disk drive Figure 9 2 Assembly of Drive Shock Mount Hardware 51108679 300 51108679 200 Snub Collar _ Snub Washer 3 5 x 10 2 E 51108679 100 T Ri T a Shock
208. nning Use Figures 9 15 and 9 17 to determine the pinning for the nonredundant 445 MB drive s In a nonredundant single drive configuration a single 445 MB drive is mounted in the front position on the tray assembly in one Winchester Drive Module Figure 9 15 illustrates the location and configuration of the jumper blocks on the 445 MB drive The drive must be configured for a SCSI bus address of 5 Also note the location of the jumpers on the Active Passive Termination jumper block The SCSI Drive Address jumper block must have jumpers in positions 1 and 3 for correct addressing The Active Passive Termination jumper block must have a jumper in position 5 to enable data parity checking and a jumper between positions 7 and 8 because SCSI bus termination resistor modules must be installed on the drive The Options jumper block should have no jumpers installed on it Terminator resistor modules must be installed on the drive as illustrated in Figure 9 16 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 182 9 5 3 Single Dual 445 MB Drive Pinning continued Terminated 445 MB Drive 5 jumper block selections Figure 9 15 Terminated 445 MB Drive 5 Jumper Block Selections Bottom View PWB 5 oo oopen Options Jumper Block t Not Used No Jumpers Drive Bottom SCSI Drive Address Jumper Block Drive Q Bottom SCSI BusTermination Resistor Modul
209. nsitive devices Use a personnel grounding strap and grounded work surfaces equipment Store and transport parts only on electrostatically safe containers 12 02 History Module Service 153 8 2 2 Fan Assembly Removal Removal procedure Remove the fan assembly 3 by turning the two fasteners and sliding the assembly out of the chassis The individual fans are not a replaceable item so the complete assembly must be replaced at the Optimum Replaceable Unit ORU level 8 2 3 Power Supply Removal Removal procedure Release the power supply 2 by simultaneously pulling outward on the extractor levers located on each side of the assembly Slide the power supply out of the History Module chassis after it has been released from its backpanel connectors The circuit board in the power supply is not a replaceable item so the complete assembly must be replaced if the board has failed 12 02 History Module Service 154 8 2 4 Circuit Board Removal Cable removal SCSI bus ribbon cables LCN coax cables K2LCN or K4LCN and SPC circuit boards O circuit boards Disconnect those cables necessary for the removal of the associated circuit board assembly Three I O circuit board assemblies have cables connected to them the SPCII I O SPC2 WDI I O WDD and LCN I O CLCN A B The SPCII I O SPC2 circuit board 8 and the WDI I O WDD circuit board 9 located in slots 2 and 5 respectively at the r
210. nt DINEE AA A A at aa Neth ee esl hs A A 106 Drive 4 or 2 Control Track Error Recovery Procedure Redundant DIAE thacea sane ceasea sad cuetea neces Snot caeehessaasaoaeaeua E aseatasiawtaa 106 Drive 5 or 3 Control Track Error Recovery Procedure 107 Accessing the Status Detail Display Procedure s 108 Volume Status Display Access Procedure cccecceceeeeeteeeeseeeeenees 110 Volume Status Display Status ccccceseceeseceeeeeseeeeeaeeeeaeeseeeeesaees 112 Initialize Reassign Sector Procedure cccccceeeseeceeeeeseeeeeseeseneeesees 114 210 Megabyte Drive SCSI Device Address Selection cceeeee 135 445 Megabyte Drive SCSI Device Address Selection ccceeeee 138 875 MB Drive 51196680 100 SCSI Bus Address Selection 144 875 MB Drive 51196680 200 SCSI Bus Address Selection 144 1 8 Gigabyte Drive SCSI Device Address Selection cccccsseeeeee 147 210 Megabyte Drive SCSI Device Address Selection c0cceeee 251 445 Megabyte Drive SCSI Device Address Selection cc0ceeeee 254 875 MB Drive 51196680 100 SCSI Bus Address Selection 257 875 MB Drive 51196680 200 SCSI Bus Address Selection 260 1 8 Gigabyte Drive SCSI Device Address Selection cccceceees 262 Restarting a WREN Type History Module Procedure Component Repiaceme ME reote ra oann an e drain E cut EEE ATRAE 290 Res
211. nt Drives History Module Configuration 54 3 6 1 Single Disk Drive Configuration cceccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeeseeeee 55 3 6 2 Dual Disk Drives Configuration 0 cc cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeesaeeeeneeenaees 57 3 7 Field AGiUStMOMtS eces en cdeegeesecwery naan geese edenseancdeiends 59 SECTION 4 WDA HISTORY MODULE WITH TYPE II DRIVE TRAYV ccsseeseees 61 4 1 OVENVICW nnna a a a e a a Aids eaea eee ea et 61 4 3 Physical Configuration cccccccseeeeeseeceeeeeceeeesaaeeeeeeeseaeeesaessaeeneaeeenaees 67 4 4 Circuit Board Configuration ccccceceeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeees 69 4 5 Nonredundant Drive History Module Configuration cececseeeeeee 70 4 5 1 Type Il Disk DrivesConfiguration 0 ccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeneeseeeeees 70 4 6 Redundant Drives History Module Configuration eseese 73 4 6 1 Type Il Disk Drives Configuration 0 ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeeeteeeees 74 4 7 Field Adjustments oriec ee ania askance eth aa tert anette ae 76 SECTION 5 TEST TROUBLESHOOTING sssecceseeeeeseeesneeeeseeeeneneeseeeseseaeeneeeenseeeeenees 77 5 1 OVOIVIOW fs citi aed ee Hi ah eee es nee ede 77 5 2 Test Strategy arerioei lies aa aa aa a aaa a a nie die 77 5 3 Trou blesh otin iseensest i e Aa REE 80 5 3 1 Preliminary CHeCKS cccccceeeeececeeeeeeaeeeeneeceeeeeceaeeeeaaeeeeeesaeeesaaeseene
212. nterface WDT circuit board in the Winchester Disk Assembly with its associated WDI T O circuit board provide the SCSI bus interface between the SPC circuit board and the Winchester disk drives SCSI bus terminators are activated when a Winchester Drive Tray is not present in the WDA or has power removed from it by its power switch Any Winchester Drive Tray that does not have power applied to it must be removed from the WDA The K2LCN or K4LCN circuit board and its associated LCN I O CLCN A B circuit board provide the electronic link between the Local Control Network LCN and the SPC circuit board The K2LCN and K4LCN circuit board contain the node processor and supporting memory For K2LCN K4LCN and LCN I O CLCN A B circuit board configuration information refer to the Five Ten Slot Module Service mionmaton manual as well as subsection 11 2 4 in this manual Configuration of the SPC circuit board is also covered in subsection 11 2 4 12 02 History Module Service 69 4 5 Overview 4 5 1 Overview Nonredundant Drive History Module Configurations The History Module can be configured for either nonredundant or redundant drive operation When configured nonredundant the Winchester Disk Assembly WDA will contain a single Winchester Drive Tray located on the assembly One single drive will be mounted on the tray Type II Disk DrivesConfiguration The Type II disk drive configuration to appears as t
213. ntroller SPC Board Backplane Connector SPCII I O Board Slot 2 Rear SCSI Bus Ribbon Cable Slot 5 Rear WDI I O Board Backplane Connector A ie Winchester Drive Interface WDI Board Bus Terminators Drive 3 Partition SCSI Cable Left Hand Tray Not Present Drive 5 51305559 100 Partition Terminator Right Hand Winchester Drive Tray l Jl J Winchester Disk Assembly 17687 12 02 History Module Service 72 4 6 Redundant Drives History Module Configurations Overview What is redundancy Redundancy drive synchronization Drive maintenancewith redundancy The History Module is capable of supporting a redundant Winchester Disk drive that is configured as a backup The additional redundant Winchester Disk drive is mounted on the left hand secondary Winchester Drive Tray that is installed in the Winchester Disk Assembly The term redundancy is used to describe a redundant Winchester Disk drive not redundant History Modules Although hard drives are quite reliable the catastrophic nature in which data is lost during a failure encourages the need for disk redundancy In a redundant configuration if software does a successful write to one drive then it will do an identical write to its redundant partner Therefore identical data is maintained on two drives in the system
214. nued Hardware configurations The 210 MB 445 MB 875 MB or 1 8 GB drive is easily identified by its small size with the size of the disk only 3 1 2 inches An adapter plate is used to adapt the drive directly to the mounting holes on the tray assembly that are normally used for the WREN III drive No shock mounts are used The Winchester Drive Modules and the electronics module are always mounted one above the other as illustrated in the Figure 2 5 A single SCSI bus ribbon cable from the SPC I O circuit board in the I O cage at the rear of the electronics module enters a slot at the rear of the lower Winchester Drive Module routes over the slide tray assembly and connects to the drive s on the tray assembly The cable then exits the module and enters the upper Winchester Drive Module where it connects to the drive s on the tray assembly In the standard nonredundant configurations the SCSI Small Computer Systems Interface often nicknamed scuzzy bus cable interconnects to one or two drives The end drive on the interface has termination resistor modules installed on it The SCSI bus ribbon cable is a group of transmission lines that must be terminated at each end on the SPC I O circuit board and at the drive end of the SCSI bus cable The actual routing of the SCSI bus ribbon cable is illustrated elsewhere in this manual If the drives are installed in a nonredundant History Module three SCSI bus termination resis
215. o Do not remove the SCSI bus ribbon cable connector from the bus terminator card 8 the SPC I O circuit board in the electronics module or the drive s in the other Winchester Drive Module because the redundant drive s is still operational Disconnect the AC power cord 2 from the power supply assembly and the fan assembly power cable 3 from its mating connector that is located at the front of the drive power supply on the tray assembly Loosen the bale fasteners on the tray pull it out of the module chassis and place it on a antistatic work surface for further disassembly 12 02 History Module Service 123 6 4 3 Power Supply Disk Drive Removal Removal procedure Referencing Figure 6 1 use the following procedure to disassemble the power supply and or disk drive s 1 Ifreplacing the power supply assembly 4 tag and remove the wires connected to the power supply s terminal board 6 Detach the power supply from the tray assembly by removing four screws lock washers and flat washers from beneath the tray assembly 2 If replacing a disk drive 5 pay particular attention to the position of the jumpers and the presence or absence of a bus terminator module WREN IID or termination resistor modules 210 MB or 455 MB on the drive These subjects are fully covered in Section 7 3 Disconnect the drive s power cable Detach the drive by removing four screws lock washers and flat washers from beneath the tray
216. o not pull on the power cable itself but on the connector only You can now remove the drive from the tray 12 02 History Module Service 160 Section 9 WREN Type History Module Assembly 9 1 Overview Section contents The topics covered in this section are Topic See Page 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 3 1 9 3 2 9 3 3 9 3 4 9 4 9 4 1 9 4 2 9 4 3 9 5 9 5 1 9 5 2 PO Po Pp a A SH CREEK EK EEE EEE NNNNNNDDDDD9D D Overview 163 Electronics Module Assembly 164 Winchester Drive Module Assembly 165 Fan Replacement 166 Power Supply Replacement 166 Disk Drive Replacement 166 Slide Tray Assembly 170 Nonredundant WREN III Drive Installation 171 Smart Peripheral Controller SPC and SPC I O Boards 171 Single Dual WREN III Drive Pinning 172 Single Dual WREN III Drive Cabling 174 Nonredundant 210 445 875 MB and 1 8 GB Drive Installation 177 Smart Peripheral Controller SPC and SPC I O Boards 178 Single Dual 210 MB Drive Pinning 179 Single Dual 445 MB Drive Pinning 184 Single Dual 875 MB Drive Pinning 189 Single Dual 1 8 GB Drive Pinning 195 Single Dual 210 445 875 MB or 1 8 GB Drive Cabling 199 Redundant WREN III Drive Installation 204 Single Drive Installation 205 Single WREN III Drive Pinning 205 Single WREN III Drive Cabling 207 Dual Drive Installation 211 Dual WREN III Drive Pinning 211 Dual WREN III Drive Cabling 213 Redundant 210 445 875 MB or 1 8 GB Drive Installation 215 Redundant Sin
217. ocks on Drive 3 The SCSI Drive Address jumper block must have jumpers installed in positions 1 and 2 for correct addressing The Active Passive Termination jumper block must have a jumper installed in position 5 to enable data parity checking No SCSI bus termination resistor modules should be installed on the drive The Options jumper block should have no jumpers installed on it Be sure that the terminator resistor modules are removed from Drive 3 In the nonredundant dual drive configuration the SCSI bus cable from the SPC I O circuit board connects first to Drive 3 and then to Drive 5 For this reason no termination resistor modules should be installed on Drive 3 They must be at the end of the SCSI bus cable on Drive 5 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 185 9 5 3 Single Dual 445 MB Drive Pinning continued Nonterminated 445 MB Drive 3 jumper block selections Figure 9 17 Nonterminated 445 MB Drive 3 Jumper Block Selections Bottom View Options Jumper Block i Not Used No Jumpers Drive Bottom SCSI Drive Address Jumper Block Drive No SCSI BusTermination Resistor Modules Active Passive Termination Jumper Block PWB a5 eeeome ee 1X 1234567 8 5 Vdc 5 Volts Return 12 Volts Return 12 Vdc 12503 A Q Bottom 12 02 History Module Service 186 9 5 4 Single Dual 875 MB Drive Pinning Overview
218. ode Address Selection 241 K4LCN Board 51401946 100 LCN Node Address Selection 242 K4LCN Board 51402755 100 LCN Node Address Selection 243 LCN I O Board LCN Node Address Selection 0 ccccccceceeseeteseeteees 244 CLCN A B Board LCN Node Address Selection cccceeeseeeeseeeees 245 Winchester Disk Assembly ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaeeeeetaeeeeetaeeeeneaa 247 Winchester Disk Assembly Exploded View c cccseecceeeeeneeeeeeeeees 248 Single Drive Winchester Drive Tray Exploded View 249 Dual Drive Winchester Drive Tray Exploded View sessen 249 210 Megabyte Drive Jumper Block Selections Bottom View 252 Bottom View of 210 MB Drive with SCSI Bus Terminators 253 445 Megabyte Drive Jumper Block Selections Bottom View 255 Bottom View of 445 MB Drive with SCSI Bus Terminators 256 875 Megabyte Drive 51196680 100 Jumper Block Selections Bottom NION T o nes A beg hye id eves A E E eave agit E deat 258 875 Megabyte Drive 51196680 200 Jumper Block Selections Bottom VION cette ea a E a a aia 261 1 8 Gigabyte Drive Jumper Block Selections Bottom View 263 210 Megabyte Drive Mounting ssssssssrrssssrneesnnesennenrnnnesnnnnnennnneennnnae 265 445 875 Megabyte and 1 8 Gigabyte Drive Mounting ccceeees 265 WDA History Module Exploded ViewW sssssssssssssrrs
219. om interfering with the rotating fan blades in the fan assembly The cable can be dressed under the WREN III drives to avoid the fan blades As illustrated in Figure 9 36 the cable is also folded under the drive so it can make a 90 turn up to the drive connector Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 211 9 6 2 2 Dual WREN IlI Drive Cabling Continued Redundant dual WREN Ill drive SCSI bus cable routing Figure 9 35 Redundant Dual WREN III Drive SCSI Bus Cable Routing Side View Bus Terminator Assembly Winchester Drive Module 2 WREN III Drive 5 WREN III Drive 3 Slide Tray Assembly Winchester Drive Module 1 WREN III WREN IlI Drive 4 Drive 2 SCSI Bus Ribbon Cable Slide Tray Assembly Electronics Module SPC I O Connector 16775 SIDE VIEW Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 212 9 6 2 2 Dual WREN IlI Drive Cabling Continued Redundant dual WREN Ill drive SCSI bus cable installation Figure 9 36 Redundant Dual WREN III Drive SCSI Cable Installation Top View Locate Approximately as Shown O Card Cage Winchester X Drive 3 or 2 ie Winchester Drive50r4 51195180 Card Guide 51195178 Bus Terminator 16759 Top View 12 02 History Module Service 213 9 7 Redundant 210 445 875 MB or 1 8 GB Drive Installation Overview Information in t
220. on Tray removal and replacement WDI circuit board Tray installation As illustrated in the exploded view of the Winchester Disk Assembly Figure 10 10 the assembly is composed of a chassis 1 a Winchester Drive Interface WDD circuit board 2 and one or two Winchester Drive Trays right hand 3 and left hand 4 that reside in the chassis The trays are physically interchangeable assemblies but must be properly configured for their application in the History Module Refer to subsection 10 4 Figure 10 10 Winchester Disk Assembly Exploded View Each tray 3 or 4 is held in place by an extractor lever and by the friction of the tray s mating connectors The tray is removed from the assembly by pulling outward on the tray s extractor lever and sliding the tray out of the chassis The Winchester Drive Interface WDI circuit board 2 is installed with five phillips head screws at the corners and forward center of the board that are accessible through holes at the top of the assembly chassis A 1 27 mm 050 inch spacer washer must be used between the circuit board and the metal chassis at each screw location It is very important that the spacers are used in mounting the board because without the spacers the board will not properly mate with the backpanel connectors Since it is very difficult to install the WDI circuit board using spacers it is recommended that the circuit board not be replaced in the
221. or modules should be installed on the drive The Terminator Power jumper block must have a jumper between pins 2 and 4 because no SCSI bus termination resistor modules should be installed on the Winchester disk drive The Parity Remote Start jumper block must have a jumper between pins 1 and 2 to enable data parity checking Be sure that the terminator resistor modules are removed from Drive 3 In the nonredundant dual drive configuration the SCSI bus cable from the SPC I O circuit board connects first to Drive 3 and then to Drive 5 For this reason no termination resistor modules should be installed on Drive 3 They must be at the end of the SCSI bus cable on Drive 5 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 180 9 5 2 Single Dual 210 MB Drive Pinning continued Nonterminated 210 MB Drive 3 jumper block selections Figure 9 14 Nonterminated 210 MB Drive 3 Jumper Block Selections Bottom View Options Jumper Block None Selected for Drives 2 5 PWB SCSI Drive Address Jumper Block PWB Parity Remote Start pwp Jumper Block 51196220 100 No Termination C2 AF _Resistor Modules I O Connector DC Power Connector Terminator Power PWB Jumper Block OAOA l X pws 5Vdc 5 Volts Return No Jumpers 12 Volts Return 12 Vdc 11843 12 02 History Module Service 181 9 5 3 Single Dual 445 MB Drive Pinning Overview Single drive pi
222. ossible to continue operation without the lost function and perform the maintenance at a more convenient time A nonrecoverable data error does not necessarily require placing the drive off line if redundant or the entire History Module off line if nonredundant Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 94 5 3 6 Nonredundant drive failure Sector initialization or reassignment procedure No information from a bad sector or a faulty nonredundant drive No information from a bad sector or a faulty redundant drive Bad sector information reported on a nonredundant drive Bad sector information reported on a redundant drive Repair Strategy continued If the drive is nonredundant and the lost functionality is critical to the process the best solution may be to replace the drive and attempt to repair the failed unit at a more favorable time If replacement is necessary and you have a spare drive from the factory for replacement it will already be formatted However you must initialize it and reload it from backup media If you know the volume file name and bad sector number you can use the sector initialization reassignment feature under the System Maintenance Control Center SMCC function See subsection 5 3 7 This feature allows you to repair the drive without a lengthy HVTS procedure In addition the faulty drive can be repaired while the History Module remains on line This is not av
223. ot Square Pad on PWB Indicates Pin 1 6762 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 253 10 4 2 Winchester Disk Drive Replacement continued 445 megabyte drive jumper blocks Figure 10 15 is an illustration of the 445 megabyte Winchester hard disk drive showing the locations of the various jumper blocks All of the jumper blocks should be checked for proper positioning of the jumpers based upon the drive s mounting location on a tray The Options jumper block is not used for all drive mounting positions There should be no jumpers installed on the jumper block Two jumper blocks must be altered if necessary to accommodate the mounting location of the drive on either a right hand or left hand tray front or rear position These are the Active Passive Termination and SCSI Drive Address jumper blocks Table 10 2 and Figure 10 15 illustrate the proper positioning of the jumpers on each jumper block for the drive s mounting position Table 10 2 445 Megabyte Drive SCSI Device Address Selection Device Tray SCSI Device Address Jumper Position Location Left Hand Rear 2 2 Right Hand Rear 3 1 and 2 Left Hand Front 4 3 Right Hand Front 5 1 and 3 Replacement drives are shipped from the factory pinned for a SCSI device address of 5 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 254 10 4 2 Winchester Disk Drive Replacement continued 445
224. ould be set but software will allow only node addresses 1 64 The 1 and 0 refer to DIP switch positions when a switch assembly is installed in place of the jumper block 51081 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 242 10 2 4 Circuit Board Replacement continued K4LCN Figure 10 6 illustrates LCN node address selection on the K4LCN board 51402755 100 LCN assembly 51402755 100 The pinning block TS1 is located at aa ctese SC eanon coordinate 7A on the board The absence of a jumper is a binary 1 Parity must be an odd number Figure 10 6 K4LCN Board 51402755 100 LCN Node Address Selection NOTE This text is not on the board TS1 Binary Weight M Jumper Removed 1 The overall number of jumpers removed including the parity jumper must be an odd number This example indicates node address 03 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 243 10 2 4 Circuit Board Replacement continued LCN I O board LCN The LCN I O and CLCN A B circuit boards 7 are associated with the node address K2LCN and K4LCN circuit boards and are installed in slot 1 of the rear seleciien card cage as illustrated in Figure 10 1 The LCN I O circuit board must be revision T or higher and must be configured for the appropriate LCN node address as illustrated in Figure 8 7 All jumpers on the K2LCN or K4LCN circuit board must be removed if the LCN address is selecte
225. ove a Winchester Drive tray If a drive is jarred while its disks are spinning there is head crash potential Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 117 6 1 Overview Continued Before proceeding Before proceeding IF the failure is in SHUT DOWN then go to The electronics module with a failure of the fan Subsection 6 2 assembly the power supply or on a circuit board A Winchester Drive Module with a failure of the Subsection 6 3 fan assembly the power supply or in one of the drives WREN Ill 210 MB 445 MB 875 MB or 1 8 GB The drive is not configured as a redundant disk drive IF the failure is in DO NOT SHUT DOWN but go to A Winchester Drive Module that is part of a Subsection 6 4 redundant drive History Module The failure is in the fan assembly the power supply or a disk drive in one of the modules Now go to the appropriate subsection for disassembly instructions 6 2 Electronics Module Disassembly Overview Refer to the Five Ten Slot Module Service or Dual Node Service manual for the applicable disassembly procedure To protect equipment from voltage transients and ensure reliable operation always remove power from the History Module before removing or replacing circuit boards or any other component in the electronics module CAUTION CAUTION Many of the assemblies used in this module are likely to contain electrostatic
226. pe I History Module hardware including hardware servicing and replacement TYPE II drive trays are described in Section 4 4 The WDA type History Module HM provides mass data storage for history files system software and customer files for the TPS system The WDA History Module is a node on the Local Control Network LCN with a specific address assigned More than one WDA History Module can reside on the network Figure 3 1 Single Drive TYPE I Winchester Drive Tray Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 41 3 1 Overview Continued WDA type History Module overview How to use this section Redundant drive configuration Field Adjustments The WDA History Module consists of the electronics necessary to interface to the LCN and the electronics necessary to control one two or four 3 5 inch Winchester hard disk drives The WDA History Module is packaged in a Five Slot Module chassis Use this section to identify the History Module parts and understand the operation of the WDA History Module Then concentrate on the sections in the manual that meet your needs such as testing troubleshooting disassembly assembly servicing and History Module startup The physical configuration of the WDA History Module can contain nonredundant or redundant drives When configured for redundant drives data is written to the redundant drives almost simultaneously If one of the drives should
227. per blocks must be altered if necessary to accommodate the mounting location of the drive on either a right hand or left hand tray front or rear position These are the Option J2 and SCSI Bus Address J6 jumper blocks Table 10 4 and Figure 10 18 and illustrate the proper positioning of the jumpers on each jumper block for the drive s mounting position Table 10 4 875 MB Drive 51196680 200 SCSI Bus Address Selection Drive Tray Location SCSI Bus Address Jumper Position Left Hand Rear 2 Al Right Hand Rear 3 AO and A1 Left Hand Front 4 A2 Right Hand Front 5 AO and A2 Replacement drives are shipped from the factory pinned for a SCSI device address of 5 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 260 10 4 2 Winchester Disk Drive Removal continued 875 megabyte drive The locations of the jumper blocks on the drive are illustrated in 51196680 200 jumper Figure 8 18 The Options J2 and SCSI Address J5 jumper blocks block locations should be altered if necessary SCSI drive addresses of 2 3 4 and 5 are the only valid addresses Figure 10 18 875 Megabyte Drive 51196680 200 Jumper Block Selections Bottom View SCSI Bus Address Jumper Block Option Jumper Block See Address Selection Table Drives 4 and 5 PWB fesse O J2 Option Jumper Block Drives 2 and 3 4 PWB TE OSME WP PD SS TE TP DC Power I O Connector Connector J1 5 Vdc 5 Vol
228. pose This section provides an orderly startup procedure to use after installation or repair of the History Module It begins with a visual checkout and concludes with the results of applying power to the History Module 12 2 Visual Checks 12 2 1 WREN Type History Module Remove the front Remove the front cover of the Winchester module and check to ensure panel that it is free of foreign matter and dirt accumulation Be sure that all connections are proper and tight Check the circuit Check that all circuit boards are installed in their assigned module slots boards and properly seated Refer to the Five Ten Slot Module Service or Dual Node Module Service manuals for the circuit board assignments Check the LCN coax Check to be sure that the Local Control Network LCN trunk cables are cables properly connected to the LCN I O CLCN A B circuit board and not cross connected Cable A yellow must be connected to the A connector and cable B green must be connected to the B connector Check the LCN node Check that the address jumpers on the LCN I O board or switches on the address jumpers CLCN A B board are correct for the LCN node selection 12 02 History Module Service 287 12 2 2 WDA Type History Module Remove the front panel Check the trays Check the circuit boards Check the SCSI bus ribbon cables Check the LCN coax cables Check the LCN Remove the front panel of the WDA History Module so that
229. r Drive 3 Partition SCSI Cable 51305559 10 Drive 5 Partition Terminat 12 02 History Module Service 75 4 7 Field Adjustments Field Adjustments There are no field adjustments required for the WDA History Module s electronics or Winchester disk drives 12 02 History Module Service 76 Section 5 Test Troubleshooting 5 1 Overview Section contents The topics covered in this section are Topic See Page 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 3 1 5 3 2 5 3 3 5 3 4 5 3 5 5 3 6 5 3 7 5 3 8 5 3 9 5 3 10 5 3 11 5 3 12 5 3 13 Overview 79 Test Strategy 79 Troubleshooting 82 Preliminary Checks 82 Sequential Troubleshooting 83 Maintenance Recommendations 87 SMCC Detailed Module Error Messages 89 Real Time Journal RTJ Messages 95 Repair Strategy 96 Data Error Recovery Technics and Documentation 98 Nonredundant Drive Data Error Recovery 99 Redundant Drive Data Error Recovery 105 Control Track Error Recovery for Sectors 1 31 108 Status Detail Display 110 Volume Status Display 112 Sector Initialization Reassignment Procedure 115 Purpose This section analyzes the hardware failure indicators and the software status displays that are displayed on the Universal Station when a failure occurs Troubleshooting tactics are presented in response to each failure indicator and status display 5 2 Test Strategy caution Consideration
230. r OP Status Command Register Config Status HW Status Paged Status Wd Current IOCB MODULE NUMBER Board Slot Number Current IOCB Addr 43 Node Type History Module Node State Running Error Entity Type Unit Error Unit Name WR04 Error Descriptor Size 20 Error Descriptor Type SPC Error _ SCSI Interface Error Error Occurrence Time 01 Feb 90 02 03 10 0335 Error Descriptor Info Drive Address Primary Code Secondary Code 5 Sense Key Sense Code 0000 3F3E 0101 0002 25D0 0601 0000 0000 11744 2 X Y 00097ADA 8002 OAFO Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 87 5 3 4 SMCC Detailed Module Error Messages Continued Identifying the failed The address of the device drive is listed in the example Figure 5 2 as drive Device_Number 5 or SCSI bus address 5 If there is more than one drive in your system this is where you can identify the physical drive in which the error occurred Determining the cause To determine the cause of the error locate the remaining four numbers of the drive failure enclosed in boxes in Figure 5 2 They are labeled Primary Code Secondary Code Sense Key and Sense Code Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 88 5 3 4 SMCC Detailed Module Error Messages continued Primary and Secondary Error Codes Use the Primary and Secondary Error Codes listed in Table
231. r Disk Assembly and assist in extracting the tray when it is in place A single drive configuration has a single drive 1 mounted at the front of the tray while the dual drive configuration has drives mounted at both the front and the rear of the tray CAUTION When power is removed from a Winchester Drive Tray the tray must be removed from the Winchester Disk Assembly as soon as possible because the SCSI bus terminators on the WDI circuit board in the Winchester Disk Assembly are electronically activated which places them in parallel with the bus terminators installed on the drive Intermittent errors could occur 12 02 History Module Service 133 7 3 1 Winchester Disk Drive Removal General CAUTION Drive removal When replacing a Winchester disk drive it is important that you duplicate all jumper block pinning on the drive Of particular interest is the SCSI bus address device and terminator pinning The replacement drive must be pinned identically If a 210 MB or 445 MB drive is being replaced notice whether or not SCSI bus termination modules are installed on the bottom of the drive A 210 MB or 445 MB drive mounted at the front of the tray must have three bus termination modules installed A 210 MB or 445 MB drive mounted at the rear of the tray must not have termination modules installed The drive has a self locking protective mechanism that is activated when power is removed from the drive Howev
232. r Disk drive s This publication will assist you in determining how to service the History Module identifying Spare parts and disassembling and reassembling the History Module when replacing a defective part This publication supports TotalPlant Solution TPS system Release 530 and earlier software releases TPS is the evolution of TDC 3000X This publication supports CE Compliant equipment Any equipment designated as CE Compliant complies with the European Union EMC and its health and safety directives All equipment entering the European countries after January 1 1996 require this type of compliance denoted by the CE Mark TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE If you need assistance If you need technical assistance contact your local Honeywell Service Organization as explained in the following paragraphs International Outside of the United States contact your local Honeywell Service customers Organization If you are not sure of the location or telephone number call your Honeywell representative for information Customers inside the Within the United States call the Technical Assistance Center TAC at United States the toll free number 1 800 822 7673 Arizona customers Within Arizona the local number for TAC is 602 313 5558 Services provided Calls to TAC are answered by a dispatcher from 7 00 A M to 5 00 P M Mountain Standard Time 6 00 A M to 4 00 P M when daylight saving time is in effect Outside of
233. r Disk Assembly 4 is composed of a chassis and two Winchester Drive Trays right hand and optional left hand that reside in the chassis The trays are interchangeable assemblies but must be properly configured for their application in the History Module Each tray is held in place by an extractor lever and by the friction of the tray s mating connectors The trays are removed from the assembly by pulling outward on their extractor lever and sliding the tray out of the chassis The Winchester Disk Assembly is removed from the History Module chassis by first removing two fasteners that are located towards the front of each side of the chassis The Winchester Disk Assembly connectors mate with backpanel connectors in the slot 5 position but are guided into position by the guide rails normally used for a circuit board in the slot 4 position The friction of the backpanel connectors tends to hold the assembly in place Assembly removal is initiated by first removing the fan assembly to gain access to the right side fastener Both assembly fasteners are then removed and the assembly is then pulled forward by grasping the metal partition dividing the tray compartments and sliding the assembly out of the History Module chassis along slot 4 s guide rails Besides the Winchester Drive Trays the Winchester Disk Assembly also contains the Winchester Drive Interface WDI circuit board which is held in place by five Phillips head screws locate
234. r is in full operation is accomplished using the procedure in Table 5 16 Use extreme care to prevent the accidental shutdown of the working drive s Table 5 16 Redundant Drive Data Error Recovery Procedure Sector Not Known Step Action 1 Use utility command OFF to set the suspected drive off line 2 If the History Module has redundant dual drives 4 drives use the utility command OFF to set all volumes on both Disk drives in the same Winchester Drive Tray off line 3 Remove power from the tray that contains the defective drive 4 Replace the defective drive using the procedures provided in this manual Sections 4 and 5 Pay particular attention to the drive s jumper block selections and whether termination modules should be installed front drive only 5 Reapply power to the tray containing the replaced drive 6 Use the utility command SYNCH to data synchronize the drive s that is presently in the off line state One SYNCH command will data synchronize both redundant drives if present Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 103 5 3 9 Reclaiming a defective redundant drive with off line HVTS Alternate method of drive recovery An alternate method of drive recovery would be to completely reformat the drive using Subtest 21 of the SCMD test under HVTS This test must be configured to add bad sectors to the existing Bad Sector List drive data error r
235. r two Winchester disk drives The non CE Compliant module illustrated is the enhanced LCN Five Slot Module Besides circuit boards that control the interface to the Local Control Network K2LCN or K4LCN and the drives SPC the module also contains two slide out trays on which the Winchester disk drives are mounted The trays are installed in a Winchester Disk Assembly WDA that occupies circuit board slots 4 and 5 in the module Only the right hand tray is present for a nonredundant drive configuration Both trays are present for a redundant drive configuration The modules have an enhanced power supply located at the bottom of the module that provides power for the circuit boards the drive s and the fan assembly A fan assembly is located at the right hand side of the module and provides cooling for the circuit boards power supply and the drive s Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 63 4 2 Non CE Compliant WDA History Module Description Continued Figure 4 2 WDA History Module Non CE Compliant Tray Power Switch Fan Assembly SPC K2LCN 2 O FRONT VIEW Power Supply Node Power Switch Reset Button Ribbon Cable WDI I C SPCII I O LCN I O REAR VIEW 6765 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 64 4 2 Description continued Non CE Compliant WDA History Module Figure 4 3 WDA History Module CE Compliant SPC K2LCN K4LCN
236. ray assembly at the front of the power supply Insert the front cover s tabs into the slots in the chassis and secure the front cover with the two quarter turn fasteners You can now refer to the History Module startup instructions in Section 9 If you have replaced a redundant drive be sure to synchronize the drives as instructed in subsection 9 4 12 02 History Module Service 168 9 4 Nonredundant WREN III Drive Installation Overview Use the supplementary information provided in this subsection when installing a nonredundant WREN III drive and associated components 9 4 1 Smart Peripheral Controller SPC and SPC I O Boards SPC Pinning No SPC I O pinning required Check the pinning jumpers in location TS1 on the Smart Peripheral Controller circuit board 51401052 100 and verify they are positioned as illustrated in Figure 9 5 The revision pinning in TS2 is factory set and must not be altered in the field Figure 9 5 SPC Board Address Pinning for SCSI Bus Address Lee iy Board Revision Socket DO NOT CHANGE ADDR REV TS1 TS2 va Program TS1 as follows al o o 1s o o PINS DESCRIPTION 16lo o 9 8 Always Shorted 10 7 Always Shorted 11 6 Always Shorted 12 5 Always Shorted 13 4 Short WREN III History Module 14 3 Open 15 2 Open 16 1 Open Setting for this application SCSI Address 7 for this application 51401052 100 SPC 38
237. re illustrated in Figure 7 jumper block 4 Only the Active Passive Termination Terminator Power and SCSI locations Drive Address jumper blocks should be altered SCSI drive addresses of 2 3 4 and 5 are the only valid addresses Figure 7 4 210 Megabyte Drive Jumper Block Selections Bottom View Options Jumper Block None Selected for Drives 2 5 PWB SCSI Drive Address Jumper Block PWB Parity Remote Start pwB Jumper Block 2 4 6 See leoo Ground Terminating Resistor Modules cs S I O Connector Termi p DC Power Connector erminator Power Drives 2 5 Jumper Block w PWB 9 2 3 4 i 5 Vdc 5 Volts Return 12 Volts Return 12 Vdc 6763 4 3 1 Drives E 2 and 3 4 2 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 136 7 3 1 Winchester Disk Drive Removal continued 210 megabyte drive SCSI bus termination resistor modules Three SCSI bus termination modules must be installed at the bottom of any Winchester disk drive that is mounted at the front position of the Winchester Drive Tray A drive mounted at the rear position on a tray never has termination resistor modules installed The location and orientation of the modules is illustrated in Figure 7 5 Be sure that the module orientation is correct The dot on the module that identifies pin 1 and or the part number must be visible A square pad on the drive s printed circui
238. re that no washers fall into the power supply by covering it with a protective material 11839 12 02 History Module Service 167 9 3 4 Slide Tray Assembly Procedure Use the following procedure to reassemble the slide out tray assembly 1 Insert the slide tray assembly into the chassis until about 15 centimeters 6 inches of the tray assembly protruding Reconnect and dress the ribbon cable s as they were originally installed and secure them in place with the cable clamp s on the slide tray assembly and or the inside surface of the module chassis Be sure the ribbon cable is secured properly and will not interfere with the fan assembly s operation Section 7 details the proper cable dress for the appropriate drive configuration Carefully slide the tray assembly into the module using special care not to pinch the ribbon cable s or bind a ribbon cable between the slide tray assembly and the back surface of the module Secure the tray assembly in position by locking the two quarter turn fasteners at the front of the tray assembly Secure the ribbon cable with the cable clamp s exterior to the module chassis If you have released the ribbon cable from the clamp at the top of the I O card cage dress the cable and secure it with the cable clamp s Reconnect the power supply s ac power cord 2 to the power supply assembly Connect the fan assembly s power cable to its mating connector that is located on the t
239. redundant Winchester Disk drives not redundant History Modules which is how some LCN nodes can be configured Although hard drives are quite reliable the catastrophic nature in which data is lost during a failure encourages the need for data to be backed up during normal operation In a redundant configuration if software does a successful write to one drive then it will do an identical write to its redundant partner Therefore identical data is maintained on two drives in the system This process is called data synchronization If a drive fails software ignores the failed drive and continues to operate with the good redundant partner If the failure occurs during a data operation on the primary drive the operation is completed using the redundant secondary drive The System Real Time Journal receives an entry identifying the specific sector and volume file name affected Redundancy is designed into the hardware so that a service technician can remove the Winchester Drive Tray that contains the failed drive without disturbing or removing power from its good partner mounted on another tray After the defective drive has been repaired or replaced the tray is reinstalled and the technician performs a data synchronization procedure that copies the data stored on the good backup drive to the repaired or replaced drive Redundancy operation is then restored To recover from an unrecoverable data error on a
240. ric display Software problem or a Go to Table 5 4 for further troubleshooting on the failure in some of the information EMPU HMPU HPK2 circuit board self tests The red indicator on the EMPU HMPU HPK2 K2LCN K4LCN or SPC circuit board is illuminated Circuit board failure The associated I O circuit board is not in the slot directly behind the circuit board Replace the circuit board with a known good one If the problem is not corrected return the original circuit board to the slot Install the I O circuit board in the correct slot The green indicator on the power supply is extinguished Power supply failure Reset the circuit breaker by cycling the power supply switch off then on Replace the power supply All the above indicators are properly illuminated System failure Check the RTJ for any reference to a History Module failure In most cases the RTJ will show the task that failed and some additional information Select SMCC from a Universal Station with an Engineering personality Printout the Active Maintenance Journal and the Detailed Module Errors that can be recorded for the History Module Go to subsection 5 3 3 If you have no RTJ or SMCC error data call TAC and discuss the error You may receive a request to connect a modem so that TAC personnel can monitor as the History Module is booted Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 82 5 3 2
241. ription WDA removal WDI circuit board replacement The Winchester Disk Assembly 4 is composed of a chassis and two Winchester Drive Trays right hand and optional left hand that reside in the chassis The trays are interchangeable assemblies but must be properly configured for their application in the History Module Each tray is held in place by an extractor lever and by the friction of the tray s mating connectors The trays are removed from the assembly by pulling outward on their extractor lever and sliding the tray out of the chassis The Winchester Disk Assembly is removed from the History Module chassis by first removing two fasteners that are located towards the front of each side of the chassis The Winchester Disk Assembly connectors mate with backpanel connectors in the slot 5 position but are guided into position by the guide rails normally used for a circuit board in the slot 4 position The friction of the backpanel connectors tends to hold the assembly in place Assembly removal is initiated by first removing the fan assembly to gain access to the right side fastener Both assembly fasteners are then removed and the assembly is then pulled forward by grasping the metal partition dividing the tray compartments and sliding the assembly out of the History Module chassis along slot 4 s guide rails Besides the Winchester Drive Trays the Winchester Disk Assembly also contains the Winchester Drive Interface WDI
242. rive 4 Jumper Block Selections Bottom View 220 Nonterminated 875 MB Drive 5 51196680 100 Jumper Block Selections222 Nonterminated 875 MB Drive 4 51196680 100 Jumper Block Selections223 Nonterminated 875 MB Drive 5 51196680 200 Jumper Block Selections225 Nonterminated 875 MB Drive 4 51196680 200 Jumper Block Selections226 Nonterminated 1 8 GB Drive 5 Jumper Block Selections Bottom View 228 Nonterminated 1 8 GB Drive 4 Jumper Block Selections Bottom View 229 Redundant Single 210 445 875 MB or 1 8 GB Drive SCSI Bus Cable ROUINO sede ana E ATO ticks dveteds pede AE 231 Redundant Single 210 445 875 MB or 1 8 GB Drive SCSI Bus Cable Installation Top View cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeseeeeeeeeneaees 232 WDA History Module Exploded View cceeeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 235 SCSI Bus Address Pinning on SPC Circuit Board cc ccccseeeeesteeeees 238 K2LCN Board 51401551 x00 LCN Node Address Selection 240 12 02 History Module Service Figure 10 4 Figure 10 5 Figure 10 6 Figure 10 7 Figure 10 8 Figure 10 9 Figure 10 10 Figure 10 11 Figure 10 12 Figure 10 13 Figure 10 14 Figure 10 15 Figure 10 16 Figure 10 17 Figure 10 18 Figure 10 19 Figure 10 20 Figure 10 21 Figure 11 1 Figure 11 2 Figure 11 3 Figure 11 4 Figure 11 5 Figure 11 6 Figure 11 7 Figure 11 8 Figure 11 9 Figure 11 10 Figure 11 11 Figure 11 12 K2LCN Board 51402615 x00 LCN N
243. rive by jumper block selection See subsection 9 4 2 for detailed installation information Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 55 3 6 1 SPC to drive tray interconnections Single Drive Configuration continued Figure 3 12 illustrates the components and interconnections between the SPC circuit board and both Winchester Drive Trays Figure 3 12 Redundant Single Drive History Module Interconnections Slot 2 Front Special Peripheral Controller SPC Board Backplane Connector SPCIl I O Board WDI I O Board Tet He Se eee ee Sees Backplane Connector lt Winchester Drive Interface WDI Board Slot 2 Rear Drive 4 Front Disk Drive Bus Terminators Primary SCSI Bus u Printed UI Flex Circuit u SCSI Bus Printed Flex Circuit Drive 5 Front Disk Drive Bus Terminators Primary Left Hand Winchester Drive Tray Right Hand Winchester Drive Tray se a ae esa a aa as Ae a es Ss cs ee ee ee ee ALSO A AOS a A 12 02 History Module Service 56 3 6 2 Dual Disk Drives Configuration Overview Mounting and pinning the drives SCSI bus termination modules The redundant dual drive configuration is physically similar to the nonredundant dual drive configuration illustrated in Figure 3 9 except both Winchester Drive Trays in the Winchester Disk Assembly have dual Type I drives or single Type II drives mounted on the tray
244. rive failed See the Network Data Entry manual for the procedure Restore the local volume and system software files Restore the Continuous History Data See subsection 7 7 in the Engineer s Reference Manual Restore all other files Refer to the Command Processor Operation manual After all of your files have been restored autoboot the History Module by either doing a double shutdown from the Universal Station or by placing the electronics module s power supply switch in the OFF 0 position for approximately 30 seconds then back to the ON 1 position If the autoboot is unsuccessful go to the troubleshooting techniques in Section 5 or call TAC for assistance Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 292 12 3 2 Nonredundant Drive Replacement Startup continued WDA type HM startup When replacing a nonredundant drive in a WDA type History Module you procedure had the option of removing power from the entire WDA History Module using the ON OFF switch on the power supply or remove power from the right hand tray using its power ON OFF switch Either method is acceptable If you used the latter method start at Step 2 in the procedure in Table 12 4 Table 12 4 Restarting a WDA Type History Module Procedure Nonredundant Drive Replacement Step Action 1 Set the Winchester Drive Tray power switch es in the ON position Place the power s
245. roller II SPC2 I O Circuit Board CE Compliant 51304907 200 9 Winchester Drive Interface WDI I O Circuit Board 51304903 100 9 Winchester Drive Interface WDI I O Circuit Board CE Compliant 51304903 200 10 WDA SCSI Bus Interface Ribbon Cable 51304808 100 BNC T Connector 51190728 105 ORU Level Replacement Item 12 02 History Module Service 304 Index 12 Vdc 141 169 254 288 5 Vdc 141 169 254 288 5 50 pin ribbon cables 250 284 A Active Maintenance Journal 9 Alphanumeric display 85 89 Alphanumeric display 100 autoboot 84 101 autoboot 87 103 backup copies of the data 84 Bad Sector List 98 101 110 Bad Sector List 58 103 Bad Sector Table 300 bad sectors 7101 103 block diagram 48 70 C cable removal 127 137 165 cabling 163 237 271 card cage 250 284 circuit board configuration information 52 73 circuit board pinning 241 275 circuit board indicators 85 circuit boards 163 237 271 coaxial T connectors 137 165 connector hold back bracket 7141 Continued on next page 74 Continuous History data 84 Control Track error 112 CORRUPTED 702 105 D data synchronization 58 77 Defect Data List 35 Defect Data List display 301 defective blocks 710 DEGRADED 02 106 Detailed Error Module message 9 12 02 History Module Service 305 Index disassembly 123 133 140 161 168 DISKPROB 39 167 dri
246. ry methods that follow in subsections 5 3 8 and 5 3 9 information in other manuals can be very helpful Table 5 12 lists the manuals of interest and the information provided by the manual The binders in which the manuals are found are referenced at the beginning of this publication Table 5 12 History Module Error Recovery Reference Manuals Manual Information Engineer s Reference Contains information on saving and restoring Continuous History and general information on synchronizing redundant drives and placing the drives on line or off line Command Processor Operation Covers utilities to copy files and volumes synchronize redundant drives and set drives on line and off line Test System Executive Contains HVTS information Hardware Verification Test System Contains HVTS information Section 9 in this manual contains information on running individual HVTS tests 5 3 8 Nonredundant Drive Data Error Recovery Drive data error when the sector is not known All data will be lost during initialization First attempt an autoboot in case the error was caused by an electronic transient If the failure reoccurs in the same way you will need to do the detailed procedure This involves scanning the drive for bad sectors adding the bad sectors to the Bad Sector List in the drive initializing the drive and reloading all volumes All data will be lost during the initialization process Th
247. so covered in subsection 8 2 4 12 02 History Module Service 49 3 5 Nonredundant Drive History Module Configurations Overview The History Module can be configured for either nonredundant or redundant drive operation When configured nonredundant the Winchester Disk Assembly WDA will contain a single Winchester Drive Tray located at the right hand side of the assembly One single or two dual drives will be mounted on the tray 3 5 1 Single Disk Drive Configuration Overview SCSI bus termination modules In a nonredundant single drive WDA History Module a single drive is pinned configured and labeled as device 5 SCSI bus address 5 while mounted in the front position of the right hand Winchester Drive Tray as illustrated in Figure 3 7 Pinning of the drive is shown in Figure 9 6 in subsection 9 4 2 Figure 3 7 Nonredundant Single Drive Configuration Modules Drive 5 Nonredundant Dual Drives 12819 Three SCSI bus termination modules must be installed on the bottom of 210 megabyte and 445 megabyte drives as illustrated in Figure 3 6 Internal bus terminators must be enabled on the 875 megabyte and 1 8 gigabyte drives by pinning configuration The terminators installed on Drive 5 terminate the SCSI bus on the right hand tray The other end of the SCSI bus is terminated by resistors on the WDI circuit board which are activated when the left hand Winchester Drive Tray is not present Se
248. spect the Smart Peripheral Controller circuit board for the proper firmware revision It must be revision G or a later revision The two firmware EPROMsS are located approximately at coordinates 18F and 18G as illustrated in Figure 10 2 If replacement is required note the orientation and location of the EPROMs 0928 101 and 0928 102 before removal Be sure to wear an ESD wriststrap that is properly grounded Remove the EPROMs and replace them Change the firmware revision on the circuit board Slide the SPC circuit board 13 as illustrated in Figure 10 1 into slot 3 of the module chassis until it is fully mated with the backpanel connectors Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 237 10 2 4 Circuit Board Replacement continued SPC circuit board SCSI bus address pinning Figure 10 2 SCSI Bus Address Pinning on SPC Circuit Board Board Revision Socket DO NOT CHANGE NOBRUOD NO Configure TS1 as follows PINS DESCRIPTION 9 8 Always Shorted 10 7 Always Shorted 11 6 Always Shorted 12 5 Always Shorted 13 4 Short WREN III or WDA History Module 14 3 Open 15 2 Open 16 1 Open 0928 101 0928 101 REV G 0928 102 0928 102 Setting for this application SCSI Address 7 for this application ee ASSY No 51401052 100 12554 SPC II SPC2 I O The SPC II SPC2 I O circuit board 8 is associated with the SPC circuit circuit board board and is inst
249. ss Remote Jumper Block SCSI Drive Address Not Used No Jumpers Se Block 5 Drive Bottom Option Select Jumper Block PWB 000000 J2 00000 5 Volts Return O 12 Volts Return 12 Vdc 54025 ood lie 5 Vde 000o 12345678 eee Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 222 9 7 1 3 Single 875 MB Drive Installation continued Nonterminated 875 Figure 9 43 illustrates the jumper selections for the 875 MB drive MB Drive 4 jumper 51196680 100 when configured as a nonterminated Drive 4 block selections 51196680 100 Figure 9 43 Nonterminated 875 MB Drive 4 51196680 100 Jumper Block Selections Bottom View SCSI Address Remote Jumper Block SCSI Drive Address Not Used No Jumpers Jumper Block J5 O 321 J1 Option Select Jumper Block PWB J2 eeecothecee 5 Volts Return 0 12 Volts Return 12345678 12 Vdc 54026 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 223 9 7 1 3 Single 875 MB Drive Installation continued 875 MB Drive 5 51196680 200 e The SCSI Bus Address J6 jumper block must have jumpers installed in positions AO and A2 for correct addressing e The Option J2 jumper block must have no jumpers installed on it The internal SCSI bus terminators on the drive must not be enabled 875 MB Drive 4 51196680 200 e The SCSI Address J6 jumper block must have a jumper installed in position A2 for correct ad
250. ssing cannot be read or the copy on the drive is damaged Check the contents of the History Module local volume If the file is missing damaged or cannot be read review Task 16 in System Startup Guide This is an error in procedure It is not an equipment failure Autoboot the History Module Go to Table 5 3 if not successful Call TAC if error 18F is repeated 1XX any other number Circuit board failure Refer to the Five Ten Slot Module Service manual Appendix A for assistance Follow the suggestions Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 83 5 3 2 Sequential Troubleshooting continued History Module Node Status error If the History Module Node Status has an error displayed use Table 5 5 Table 5 5 Troubleshooting Procedure History Module Node Status Errors Indication Possible Cause Solution FAIL or ISOLATED o to Table 5 3 WARNING An abnormal condition Select the HM STATUS DETAIL target to obtain exists additional information SEVERE A critical abnormal Select the HM STATUS DETAIL target to obtain condition exists additional information PWR_ON or QUALIF Note Each of these states should always be temporary Do this task only if the state is permanent Software corruption Autoboot the History Module with the History Module Initialization personality If the problem is not corrected transfer a fresh copy of t
251. sssrssrrrssrrrrssrsrnssns 269 SCSI Bus Address Pinning on SPC Circuit Board cceceesseeeenees 272 K2LCN Board 51401551 x00 LCN Node Address Selection 274 K2LCN Board 51402615 x00 LCN Node Address Selection 275 K4LCN Board 51401946 100 LCN Node Address Selection 276 K4LCN Board 51402755 100 LCN Node Address Selection 277 LCN I O Board LCN Node Address Selection cccccceeeeeeseeeeseeteees 278 CLCN A B Board LCN Node Address Selection cccsseeeeeeeeeereeees 279 Winchester Disk Assembly ccccceeeccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeesnseaeeeeneeaeenenees 281 Winchester Disk Assembly Exploded View cccsecceeseeceeeeeeeeees 282 Single Drive Winchester Drive Tray Exploded View 283 Winchester ST39175LW Drive Pinning ccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 286 12 02 History Module Service Tables Table 1 1 Table 5 1 Table 5 2 Table 5 3 Table 5 4 Table 5 5 Table 5 6 Table 5 7 Table 5 8 Table 5 9 Table 5 10 Table 5 11 Table 5 12 Table 5 13 Table 5 14 Table 5 15 Table 5 16 Table 5 17 Table 5 18 Table 5 19 Table 5 20 Table 5 21 Table 5 22 Table 5 23 Table 5 24 Table 7 1 Table 7 2 Table 7 3 Table 7 4 Table 7 5 Table 10 1 Table 10 2 Table 10 3 Table 10 4 Table 10 5 Table 12 1 Table 12 2 Table 12 3 Table 12 4 Table 12 5 Table 12 6 Winchester Disk Drive Capacities
252. st during a failure indicates a possible need for data to be backed up during normal operation In a redundant configuration software does a successful write to one WREN II 210 MB 445 MB 875 MB or 1 8 GB drive then does an identical write to its redundant partner to provide two drives with identical databases The process is called data synchronization If a hard drive crash occurs software ignores the failed drive and continues to operate with its good partner The redundant hardware is designed so that a maintenance technician can remove the failed drive without disturbing or removing power from its good partner After the drive has been replaced the technician performs a synchronization task that copies the data to the new drive and restores redundant operation Redundancy is designed into the hardware so that a service technician can remove the Winchester Drive Tray that contains the failed drive without disturbing or removing power from its good partner mounted on another tray After the defective drive has been repaired or replaced the tray is reinstalled and the technician performs a data synchronization procedure that copies the data stored on the good backup drive to the repaired or replaced drive Redundancy operation is then restored To recover from an unrecoverable data error on a drive bad sectors can be initialized or assigned to the Defect Data List while system operation con
253. story Module Status display and perform a SHUTDOWN command For a redundant drive system place the drive s off line on the Winchester Drive Tray to be removed Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 125 7 1 Overview Continued Before proceeding Before proceeding IF the failure is in SHUT DOWN then go to The electronics and auxiliary components with a failure in the fan assembly the power supply or in a circuit board Subsection 7 2 The Winchester Disk Assembly with a failure of a drive and the History Module is not configured for redundancy because only the right hand Winchester Drive Tray exists Subsection 7 3 IF the failure is in DO NOT SHUT DOWN but go to The Winchester Disk Assembly with a failure of a drive and the History Module is configured for redundancy because both Winchester Drive Trays have one or two drives Subsection 7 3 Now go to the appropriate subsection for disassembly instructions 7 2 History Module Disassembly Overview Refer to the Five Ten Slot Module Service manual for any additional disassembly procedure assistance To protect the equipment from voltage transients and ensure reliable operation always place the power supply ON OFF switch in the OFF position before removing or replacing the circuit boards power supply fan assembly cables or the Winchester Disk Assembly One or both Winchest
254. story Module back on line or it can delay the recurrence of the problem to a more favorable time However remember the autoboot can also destroy some status indicators originally set as a result of a fault Table 4 2 lists some possible intermittent problems and their correction Table 5 2 Troubleshooting Procedure History Module Operates Intermittently Indication Possible Cause Solution The History Module reports an error but the reload of the personality software or an autoboot temporarily solves the problem The problem returns in a day or so Open or loose cable Check out the cable connections on all of the boards and the drives Inspect the cables for damage Remove the cables and inspect them for nicks and cuts caused by pinching Repair or replace damaged cable Intermittent board failure Remove and reseat all the circuit boards Replace the circuit boards one at atime If the problem is not corrected after you replace a circuit board reinstall the original circuit board Damaged backpanel or Replace the History Module chassis damaged wiring Do a test run Finally do a test run through the troubleshooting procedures that follow You can more accurately estimate how long it will take to correct a problem Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 79 5 2 Test Strategy Continued TAC is available The Honeywell Technical Assistance Cent
255. story Module illustrating the path between the LCN and the Winchester disk drives A functional description of the enhanced Five Slot Module chassis that provides the electronics for the WDA History Module hardware can be found in the Five Ten Slot Module Service manual Figure 3 5 WDA History Module Block Diagram WDI I O SCSI Bus Ribbon Cables Left Tray Right Tray M O SPC SPCII I O D U L LCN A Coax E K2LCN LCN I O LCN B Coax B U Power Supply S 5 V 12 V HM Fan Optional Disk Drives 9457 12 02 History Module Service 46 3 3 Physical Configuration Winchester disk drives SCSI bus interconnections SCSI bus termination The Winchester hard disk drives one two or four can be present are mounted on two Winchester Drive Trays resident in the Winchester Disk Assembly that occupies the upper two circuit board slots slots 4 and 5 of the module as illustrated in Figures 3 2 and 3 3 Dual Small Computer Systems Interface SCSI bus ribbon cables connect the Smart Peripheral Controller I O SPCI SPC2 circuit board located at the rear of the Smart Peripheral Controller SPC circuit board slot 2 to the Winchester Drive Interface I O WDI I O WDI circuit board located at the rear of the Winchester Disk Assembly slot 5 The Winchester Drive Interface WDD circuit board located in the Winchester Disk Assembly WDA extends the S
256. structions and references for maintenance test troubleshooting and repair of the TPS system WREN type or WDA type History Module HM The WREN type History Module includes an electronics module and one or two Winchester Drive Modules The electronics module consists of a Five Slot Module or one Local Control Network LCN node of a Dual Node Module original WREN III type History Modules only The electronics module interfaces to one or two Winchester Drive Modules and contains functional circuit boards associated I O circuit boards a fan assembly and a power supply The Winchester Drive Module contains one or two Winchester Disk drives a fan assembly and a power supply Software Release 520 supports only the WREN III type of History Module The WREN I and WREN II types of History Modules are not supported by the software or this manual The WREN III type of History Module can be upgraded to accommodate one or more 210 megabyte MB 445 megabyte MB 875 megabyte MB or 1 8 gigabyte GB dual logical 875 MB or 1 8 GB drive s while using WREN III History Module components such as SPC and SPC I O circuit boards and a SCSI bus ribbon cable The WDA type History Module which is packaged in a Five Slot Module chassis includes the following basic components e Local Control Network LCN node electronics e Winchester disk drive controller electronics e one two or four 3 1 2 inch Winchester disk drives Con
257. t board locates pin 1 It is possible to reverse the orientation of the modules The modules provide end termination for the SCSI bus when the Winchester Drive Tray is present With the tray removed resistor terminators on the Winchester Drive Interface WDD circuit board in the Winchester Dive Assembly provide the bus termination Figure 7 5 Bottom View of 210 MB Drive with SCSI Bus Terminators Pin 1 Dot or Part Numbe Square Pad on PWB Indicates Pin 1 6762 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 137 7 3 1 Winchester Disk Drive Removal continued 445 megabyte drive jumper blocks Figure 7 6 is an illustration of the 445 megabyte Winchester hard disk drive showing the locations of the various jumper blocks All of the jumper blocks should be checked for proper positioning of the jumpers based upon the drive s mounting location on a tray The Options jumper block is not used for all drive mounting positions There should be no jumpers installed on the jumper block Two jumper blocks must be altered if necessary to accommodate the mounting location of the drive on either a right hand or left hand tray front or rear position These are the Active Passive Termination and SCSI Drive Address jumper blocks Table 7 2 and Figure 7 6 illustrate the proper positioning of the jumpers on each jumper block for the drive s mounting position Table 7 2 445 Megabyte Drive SCSI Device
258. talled on the drive e The Options jumper block should have no jumpers installed on it e The SCSI Drive Address jumper block must have a jumper installed in position 3 for correct addressing e The Active Passive Termination jumper block must have a jumper installed in position 5 to enable data parity checking No SCSI bus termination resistor modules should be installed on the drive e The Options jumper block should have no jumpers installed on it No SCSI bus termination resistor modules should be installed on either drive Bus termination is provided at the drive end of the SCSI bus cable by a bus terminator card Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 218 9 7 1 2 Single 445 MB Drive Pinning continued Nonterminated 445 MB Drive 5 jumper block selections Figure 9 40 Nonterminated 445 MB Drive 5 Jumper Block Selections Bottom View Options Jumper Block t Not Used No Jumpers Drive Bottom SCSI Drive Address Jumper Block No SCSI BusTermination Resistor Modules Active Passive Termination Jumper Block PWB e emle oo A 12345678 5Vdc 5 Volts Return 12 Volts Return 12 Vdc fF 12506 A Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 219 9 7 1 2 Single 445 MB Drive Pinning continued Nonterminated 445 MB Drive 4 jumper block selections Figure 9 41 Nonterminated 445 MB Drive 4 Jumper Block Select
259. tarting a WDA Type History Module Procedure Component Replacement cutviy ccavantis aici hie tc A debt 291 Restarting a WREN Type History Module Procedure Nonredundant Drive REPlaACOMO nti ivesccsactdshicauas es et TE T EE ANEAN AESSR 292 Restarting a WDA Type History Module Procedure Nonredundant Drive Replacement asirios nia E E dive linen ide adie 293 Restarting a WREN Type History Module Procedure Redundant Drive Replacement eraisten rin aen rh PEEN aT AE a EEE EN AEREE 294 Restarting a WDA Type History Module Procedure Redundant Drive Replacemenl esa a a a a a A 294 Redundant Drives Data Synchronization Procedure ccceseeeees 295 HVTS SCMD Test 21 Procedure cccccecsesceeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeesseeeenseneeens 297 SCMD Test 21 Parameters ccccesccceeseseeceseeseeeeeseeeesesaeeessesaeeeeseaas 298 WREN Type Drive History Module Parts List 302 WDA Type Drive History Module Parts List ce eeceeeeeteeeesteeeeeeaee 303 12 02 History Module Service xi Acronyms Bit Byte CRC ECC GB HMI HMO HVTS LCN LED NCF NCF ORU PWB RTJ SCMD SMCC TAC WDA Binary 1 or 0 Eight data bits Cyclic Redundancy Check Error Correction Code Gigabyte History Module Initialization History Module Operating Hardware Verification Test System Local Control Network Light Emitting Diode Network Configuration File Network Configuration File Optimum Replaceable Unit Printed Wir
260. te Drive 51196680 100 Jumper Block Selections Bottom View SCSI Address Remote Jumper Block Not Used No Jumpers 6 SCSI Drive Address Jumper Block Drive See Address Selection Table Bottom Option Select Jumper Block Drives 4 and 5 PWB gt J2 J1 t A 5 Vdc 5 Volts Return 12 Volts Return 12 Vdc N eee ecole ot Tn aoe Option Select Jumper Block Drives 2 and 3 Be J2 sip gt ha se e A 12345678 16762 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 142 7 3 1 Winchester Disk Drive Removal continued 875 megabyte drive 51196680 100 SCSI bus termination Unlike the 210 and 445 megabyte drives the 875 megabyte drive 51196680 100 does not accommodate external SCSI bus termination modules on the bottom of the drive Bus terminators are permanently located on the drive s PWB and activated by jumpers on the Option Select J2 jumper block as illustrated in Figure 7 8 The SCSI bus terminators must be enabled on any drive that is mounted in the front position of the Winchester Drive Tray A drive mounted in the rear position on a tray must never have its bus terminators enabled The modules provide end termination for the SCSI bus when the Winchester Drive Tray is present With the tray removed resistor terminators on the Winchester Drive Interface WDD circuit board in the Winchester Dive Assembly provide the bus ter
261. ted at a serecuon coordinate 7A on the board The absence of a jumper is a binary 1 Parity must be an odd number Figure 10 4 K2LCN Board 51402615 x00 LCN Node Address Selection NOTE This text is not on the board TS1 Binary Weight a Jumper Removed 1 The overall number of jumpers removed including the parity jumper must be an odd number This example indicates node address 03 7739 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 241 10 2 4 Circuit Board Replacement continued K4LCN Figure 10 5 illustrates LCN node address selection on the K4LCN board 51401946 100 LCN assembly 51401946 100 The pinning block TS2 is located at coordinate address selection an odd number 21E on the board The absence of a jumper is a binary 1 Parity must be Figure 10 5 K4LCN Board 51401946 100 LCN Node Address Selection LCN Add ress 8G Pinning PARITY 64 32 16 BINARY 8 WEIGHT N A N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N AWW eeeceeeeceecceeeeeeeeeeeceeceeceeeeeceeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeedeeedeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeedeeeeeeeeeeeeeedeeeeedddeeeeddddd NOT ON BOARD This Sample is 43 LCN ADDRESS Jumper Out 1 Jumper In 0 The overall number of jumpers out including the parity jumper must be an odd number Note that addresses 0 127 c
262. termination resistor modules Each drive is housed in a separate Winchester Drive Module The configuration of a History Module with redundant single 210 megabyte drives is illustrated in Figure 9 37 The drives are located in the front positions on the tray assembly in both drive chassis and must be pinned as drive 5 upper drive chassis and drive 4 lower drive chassis as illustrated in Figures 9 38 and Figure 9 39 respectively Note the positions of the configuration jumpers on the drives If necessary reposition the pinning e The SCSI Drive Address jumper block must have jumpers between pins 1 and 2 and pins 5 and 6 for correct addressing e The Active Passive Termination jumper block must have no jumpers installed because no SCSI bus termination resistor modules should be installed on the drive e The Terminator Power jumper block must have a jumper installed between pins 2 and 4 because the SCSI bus termination modules should not be installed e The Parity Remote Start jumper block must have a jumper between pins 1 and 2 to enable data parity checking e The Options jumper block should have no jumpers installed e The SCSI Drive Address jumper block must have a jumper installed between pins and 2 for correct addressing e The Active Passive Termination jumper block must have no jumpers installed because the SCSI bus termination resistor modules should be installed on the drive e The Terminator Power
263. the upper module where it connects to Drive 5 It then connects to a bus terminator card mounted at the top of the upper Winchester Drive Module chassis Figure 9 30 Redundant Single WREN III Drive SCSI Bus Cable Routing Side View ___ Bus Terminator Winchester Assembly Drive Module 2 WREN III Drive 5 Winchester Drive Module 1 ss WREN III SCSI Bus Drive 4 Ribbon Cable Slide Tray Assembly Electronics Module SPC I O Connector SIDE VIEW 16772 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 205 9 6 1 2 Single WREN IlI Drive Cabling continued Terminator Card Guide assembly Ribbon cable red stripe positioning Avoid the fan blades The bus terminator card is illustrated in Figure 9 31 Figure 9 31 Terminator Card Guide Assembly 51195180 Lee rare oes PA ASSY NO 51195178 100 REV mo Je RN3 1 Chassis OO Terminator ae Card Guides 2103 Front and top views of the modules are illustrated in Figures 9 32 and 9 33 respectively The SCSI bus cable always connects to a WREN III drive with the red stripe on the right side of the drive as you face the connectors on the drive Use special care to prevent the ribbon cables from interfering with the rotating fan blades in the fan assembly The cables can be dressed under the WREN III drives to avoid the fan blades Note that the cable is folded under the driv
264. these hours emergency calls those which affect your ability to control or view a process will be received by an answering service and returned within one hour TAC maintains its own TPS system and frequently can duplicate equipment problems Time saving tip It is a good idea to make specific notes about the problem before making the call This will help to reduce delays and expedite answers 12 02 History Module Service iii Scope ATTENTION DANGER WARNING SHOCK HAZARD DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE Standard Symbols The standard symbols used in this publication are defined as follows Notes inform the reader about information that is required but not immediately evident Cautions tell the user that damage may occur to equipment if proper care is not exercised Warnings tell the reader that potential personal harm or serious economic loss may happen if instructions are not followed Ground connection to building safety ground Ground stake for building safety ground Electrical Shock Hazard can be lethal Electrical Shock Hazard can be lethal Rotating Fan can cause personal injury Caution refer to the appropriate installation document 12 02 History Module Service iv Table of Contents SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION cove ccececiciecseeevet ecenceds teececetedcdestiedsscecncctestuteeevedtenseestuneeenctes 15 1 1 Over EW fcc ieee ain an AT a ee ee a 15
265. tinued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 15 1 1 Overview Continued WDA History Module contents WDA Drive Tray Type Il WDA Drive Tray Drive capacities The WDA History Module consists of e Functional circuit boards and associated I O circuit boards e A Winchester Disk Assembly WDA that occupies two card slots and contains one or two Winchester Drive Trays One or two 3 5 inch Winchester disk drives are mounted on the Winchester Drive Trays e A fan assembly and an enhanced power supply One or two Winchester Drive Trays resident in the Winchester Disk Assembly contain one or two 3 5 inch Winchester hard disk drives that are formatted for 256 bytes per sector The drive has a maximum storage capacity of approximately 210 megabytes 445 megabytes 875 megabytes or 1 8 gigabytes GB where a megabyte is a unit of 1 024 000 bytes and a gigabyte is 1 024 000 000 bytes Each drive tray holds one hard drive that looks like two hard drives when placed in the WDA HM A drive pinned as SCSI ID 5 looks like 5 3 A drive pinned as SCSI ID 4 looks like 4 2 The drive acts as a pair of dual drives with a capacity of two 875 MB or two 1 8 GB drives and so the History Module must be configured as a Dual Drive HM Although the WREN III type drive is physically much larger in size than the than the 210 megabyte 445 megabyte 875 megabyte and 1 8 gigabyte Winchester disk drives its formatted storage capac
266. tinues using the good drive Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 33 2 3 Redundant Drive History Modules continued Redundant physical configurations Redundant electronics module configuration ATTENTION The Winchester Drive Modules and the electronics modules are always mounted one above the other as illustrated in Figures 2 1 and 2 5 A single SCSI bus ribbon cable from the SPC I O card in the card cage at the rear of the electronics module enters a slot at the rear of the lower Winchester Drive Module routes over the slide out tray assembly and connects to the drive s on the tray assembly The cable then exits the module and enters the upper Winchester Drive Module where it connects to the drive s on its tray assembly In redundant configurations this SCSI Small Computer Systems Interface often nicknamed scuzzy bus cable interconnects up to four drives in a continuous string before ending at a bus terminator card in the upper Winchester Drive Module The SCSI bus ribbon cable is a group of transmission lines and must be terminated at each end The bus is terminated on the SPC TO circuit board and also at the drive end of the SCSI bus cable The actual routing of the SCSI bus cable is illustrated elsewhere in this manual Since a SCSI bus terminator card is located at the physical end of the SCSI bus ribbon cable where it is fastened to the top of the upper Winchester Drive Mod
267. to the History Module first load a Universal Station with HVTS Then download HVTS to the History Module 2 After loading HVTS to the selected History Module press Answer the prompt that ends with ALL with NOD XX where XX is the node number of the History Module Now press and answer the prompt with SET SCMD The program displays several functions that should have the parameters shown in Table 12 6 If they are correct simply press lf they must be changed type in the change then press 3 After the last entry press then type MOD S and press Again press then type RUN and press SCMD Test 21 will run printing a list of defective Logical Block addresses before and after the test runs and then the bad sectors will be reassigned The Defect Data List display is in raw hex format because form and content of defective data varies depending on the drive vendor Since detection and reassignment of bad sectors is automatic the actual defective data printed is only of a casual concern to the user Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 297 12 5 1 Drive Formatting Procedure continued SCMD Test 21 parameters Table 12 9 SCMD Test 21 Parameters Function Parameter Comment EVICE_6 NOT_IN_USE EVICE_7 NOT_IN_USE enter more than one by entering the parameter W abbreviation for WREN3_ FMD or FMD for 210 445 875 MB and 1 8 GB drives List all other devices as NO
268. tor DC Power Connector Cable 51303536 061 16755 12 02 History Module Service 36 2 3 1 Redundant Single Drive Configuration continued Redundant single drive interconnections Figure 2 11 Redundant Single 210 445 875 MB or 1 8 GB Drive Components and Interconnections 5 Slot Module HM SPC 51401052 100 5 Slot Module HM HMPU 51400978 100 Power Supply Front View Rear View Front Panel Omitted SPC I O 51304156 100 LCN VO ye 107403 100 Red Line A 51190728 105 a 51190728 105 Drive Power Supply Fan Assembly Cable 51303549 100 Power Cord SCSI Bus Ribbon Cable 51304193 100 Fan Assembly Drive 4 Rear View DC Power Cable 51303536 061 Fan Assembly Cable 51303549 100 Fan Assembly Drive 5 Rear View Terminator Board 51195180 100 Upper Winchester Drive Chassis Top View DC Power Cable 51303536 061 Note Depending upon the manufacturing date of the History Module an EMPU HMPU or HPK2 could be installed in slot 1 If an HPK2 is installed in slot 1 the SPC and SPC 1 O circuit boards must be installed in slot 4 because no more than than two empty slots can exist between circuit boards 11853 12 02 History Module Service 37 2 3 2 Redundant Dual Drive Configuration Overview Drive pinning
269. tor modules are located on the last drive on the cable When drives are installed in a redundant History Module a bus terminator card provides the termination at the physical end of the SCSI bus ribbon cable separate from the last drive on the bus The bus terminator card is fastened to the top of the upper Winchester Drive Module chassis This arrangement permits a failed drive to be disconnected while power is applied and not disturb its redundant partner on the same SCSI bus Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 28 2 2 2 210 445 875 MB and 1 8 GB History Module Description Continued Electronics module configuration Drive configurations The functional board complement of the electronics module varies for different software releases See the Five Ten Slot Module Service or Dual Node Module Service manual for the board complement that matches your original hardware The Smart Peripheral Controller SPC circuit board and its associated SPC I O circuit board are used to communicate with the drives For other current board types refer to the Five Ten Slot Module Service or Dual Node Module Service manual This is an LCN module using standard LCN cabling See the Five Ten Slot Module Service or Dual Node Module Service manual for LCN cabling information The drive mounted in the Winchester Drive Module is designated Drive 5 referred to as as Device 5 and must be pinned configured for
270. ts e One or two Winchester disk drives 1 and 2 A single drive tray contains one drive and a dual drive tray contains two drives e A printed flex circuit 3 that interconnects the drive s with the tray connector 4 that interfaces to the WDI circuit board in the Winchester Disk Assembly The printed flex circuit provides the SCSI bus interface to the drive s e A connector hold back bracket 5 prevents damage to the printed flex circuit when only the front drive is mounted on the tray The bracket is installed to rigidly hold the unused connector in place It is held in place by two phillips head screws using holes intended for mounting the rear drive The connector attaches to the bracket with two screws e A power ON OFF switch 6 to control power from the power supply to the drive s and SCSI bus terminators on the WDI circuit board in the Winchester Disk Assembly When power is removed from the tray SCSI bus terminators are activated on the WDI circuit board in anticipation of the loss of the bus terminators installed on a Winchester disk drive on the tray that is about to be removed The terminators are installed on the drive that is mounted at the front of the tray e A tray power connector 7 that interfaces to the WDI circuit board in the Winchester Disk Assembly and provides 5 Vdc 12 Vdc and ground return to the drive s from the power supply e An extractor lever 8 used to lock the tray in place in the Wincheste
271. ts Return 42 Volts Return 12 Vdc 16725 B Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 261 10 4 2 Winchester Disk Drive Removal continued 875 megabyte drive Unlike the 210 and 445 megabyte drives the 875 megabyte drive 51 196680 200 51196680 200 does not accommodate external SCSI bus termination POS pUS termination modules on the bottom of the drive Bus terminators are permanently located on the drive s PWB and activated by jumpers on the Option J2 jumper block as illustrated in Figure 10 18 The SCSI bus terminators must be enabled on any drive that is mounted in the front position of the Winchester Drive Tray A drive mounted in the rear position on a tray must never have its bus terminators enabled The modules provide end termination for the SCSI bus when the Winchester Drive Tray is present With the tray removed resistor terminators on the Winchester Drive Interface WDD circuit board in the Winchester Dive Assembly provide the bus termination 1 8 gigabyte drive Figure 10 19 is an illustration of the 1 8 gigabyte Winchester hard disk jumper blocks drive showing the locations of the various jumper blocks All of the jumper blocks should be checked for proper positioning of the jumpers based upon the drive s mounting location on a tray Two jumper blocks must be altered if necessary to accommodate the mounting location of the drive on either a right hand or left hand tray
272. ule module 2 there are no bus terminators installed on the drives This arrangement permits a failed drive to be removed and replaced without disturbing power to its redundant partner on the same SCSI bus A Smart Peripheral Controller SPC circuit board and its associated SPC I O card are used to communicate with the drives The other board types in the electronics module can vary with the type of LCN module Five Slot Module or Dual Node Module and can be a function of the software release For board configuration information refer to the Five Ten Slot Module Service or Dual Node Module Service manual This is an LCN module using standard LCN cabling See the Five Ten Slot Module Service or Dual Node Module Service manual for LCN cabling information ATTENTION History Modules with redundant disk drive configurations do not include redundant electronics modules History Modules are not available with redundant electronics 12 02 History Module Service 34 2 3 1 Redundant Single Disk Drive Configuration Overview Drive pinning A History Module with redundant single drives is physically similar to a History Module with nonredundant dual drives as illustrated in Figures 2 1 and 2 5 The only physical difference is the presence of a bus terminator card that is mounted underneath the top surface of the upper Winchester Drive Module module 2 The drive mounted in the top Winchester Drive Module module 2
273. umber If it does of each HM node reload the HM personality and continue HM software is performing an interim operation Wait 1 NODE STATUS LOAD TEST or READY minute or less and look for a state change Power is off or this node is not connected to the LCN Correct the problem Make sure printer is on Print out any error message found that follows N NODE STATUS is PWR_ON or QUALIF SEVERE OR WARNING The node has failed or become isolated on the LCN The History Module software personality is suspect An abnormal or critical condition exists Go to Table 4 3 Soran S Go to Table 4 5 16761 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 81 5 3 2 Sequential Troubleshooting continued Use the printer Enable the printer and record status and error messages as you are investigating a problem If the failure cannot be corrected by performing these procedures you will need these messages when you contact the Honeywell Technical Assistance Center TAC The History Module will not boot Table 5 3 FAIL or ISOLATED If the History Module will not boot or the History Module s Node Status is FAIL or ISOLATED use Table 5 3 Troubleshooting Procedure History Module Will Not Boot or Node Status is K2LCN K4LCN board is not displaying the correct LCN node number Indication Possible Cause Solution The Alphanume
274. upply ON OFF switch in the ON position Check that all red LEDs extinguish and that all green LEDs illuminate within approximately 1 5 minutes Check that the alphanumeric display on the K2LCN circuit board shows the correct LCN node address for the History Module 2 If you replaced a defective drive with a factory replacement the drive has been formatted at the factory If you replaced a defective drive with a drive previously used in another History Module the drive must be reformatted Reformat the drive using the procedure in subsection 12 5 before continuing 3 You must now initialize the History Module using the original NCF you saved before the drive failed See the Network Data Entry manual for the procedure 4 Restore the local volume and system software files 5 Restore the Continuous History Data See subsection 7 7 in the Engineer s Reference Manual 6 Resiore all other files Refer to the Command Processor Operation manual 7 After all of your files have been restored autoboot the History Module by either doing a double shutdown from the Universal Station or by placing the power supply s ON OFF switch in the OFF position for approximately 30 seconds then back to the ON position If the autoboot is unsuccessful go to the troubleshooting techniques in Section 5 or call TAC for assistance 12 02 History Module Service 293 12 3 3 Redundant Drive Replacement Startup WREN type HM Use the procedure in Table 12 5 when repla
275. uration continued Redundant dual WREN Ill drive interconnections Figure 2 12 Redundant Dual WREN III Drive Components and Interconnections SPC I O WREN III 51304156 100 SCSI Bus Cable 51304194 100 SCSI Bus Terminator Assembly 51195178 100 Installed at End of Bus in Drive Module 2 Winchester Drive r Top View Winchester Drive Module 2 Top View Winchester Drive Module 1 Top View SCSI Bus Cable Connector DC Power Connector Note SCSI Bus Terminators must be removed from all drives Cable 51303996 06 1 12 02 History Module Service 2 3 2 Redundant Dual Drive C onfiguration Continued Redundant dual 210 445 875 MB or 1 8 GB drive interconnections Figure 2 13 and Interconnections Redundant Dual 210 445 875 MB or 1 8 GB Drive Components 5 Slot Module HM SPC I O LCN 1 0 Rear View LCN I 51107403 101 J LCN B A 51190728 105 51190728 105 Drive Power Supply Fan Assembly Cab 51303549 100 Power Cord Lower Winchester Drive Chassis Top View Power Cord 51303549 100 5 Slot Module HM SPC 51401052 100 5 P LCN 51400667 100 2 HMPU 51400978 100 1 P Power Supply Front View Front Panel Omitted SPC I O 51304156 100 ooo 4 Red Line
276. urpose of this section Purpose of the History Module History Module overview How to use this section This section describes the four possible configurations for the WREN type History Module HM hardware including hardware servicing and replacement The WREN type History Module provides mass data storage for history files system software and customer files for the TPS system The History Module is a node on the Local Control Network LCN with a specific address assigned More than one History Module can reside on the network The History Module consists of a lower Five Slot or Dual Node electronics module and one or two upper Winchester Drive Modules The electronics module contains the electronic control functionality while each Winchester Drive Module is capable of containing one or two Winchester disk drives Use this section to identify the type of WREN History Module you have which is based on the type of drive used in it The types of WREN History Modules are WREN III or a WREN III History Module that has been upgraded to accommodate one or more 210 megabyte MB 445 megabyte 875 megabyte or 1 8 gigabyte GB drives Then concentrate on the sections in the manual that meet your needs such as testing troubleshooting disassembly assembly servicing and History Module startup Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 19 2 1 Overview Continued Redundant drive configuration
277. us termination 12 02 History Module Service 146 7 3 1 Winchester Disk Drive Removal continued 1 8 gigabyte drive jumper blocks Figure 7 10 is an illustration of the 1 8 gigabyte Winchester hard disk drive showing the locations of the various jumper blocks All of the jumper blocks should be checked for proper positioning of the jumpers based upon the drive s mounting location on a tray The SCSI Address Remote J6 jumper block is not used in any drive mounting positions There should be no jumpers installed on the jumper block Two jumper blocks must be altered if necessary to accommodate the mounting location of the drive on either a right hand or left hand tray front or rear position These are the Option Select J2 and SCSI Address J5 jumper blocks Table 7 5 and Figure 7 10 illustrate the proper positioning of the jumpers on each jumper block for the drive s mounting position Table 7 5 1 8 Gigabyte Drive SCSI Device Address Selection Device Tray SCSI Device Address Jumper Position Location Left Hand Rear 2 2 Right Hand Rear 3 1 and 2 Left Hand Front 4 3 Right Hand Front 5 1 and 3 Replacement drives are shipped from the factory pinned for a SCSI device address of 5 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 147 7 3 1 Winchester Disk Drive Removal continued 1 8 gigabyte drive The locations of the jumper blocks on the drive are il
278. ve maintenance 35 58 77 pinning 37 59 drive mounting 144 147 150 157 255 258 261 Drive 2 61 78 Drive 3 56 Drive 4 59 Drive 5 56 74 drive tray interconnections 55 57 60 62 76 79 Dual drive configuration 33 dual drive tray 141 254 E electrical transients 702 Electronics module configuration 31 Electrostatic Discharge 164 238 272 ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ESD 82 EMPU HMPU HPK2 K2LCN K4LCN 85 Engineering Main Menu 9 Engineering Personality Main Menu display 121 ESD 164 238 272 external cable 250 284 extractor lever 141 169 F failure indicators 87 fan assembly 45 67 85 126 136 164 163 237 271 fan assembly 240 274 Fan failure 728 fast load cartridges 84 field adjustments 20 44 63 66 80 flowchart 87 front panel 135 163 G grounding strap 141 169 H Hardware Verification Test System 87 History Module description 238 272 History Module Status display 104 108 HMI personality 701 107 108 HMI personality 104 HVTS 105 110 HVTS 101 HVTS SCMD Test 21 301 12 02 History Module Service 306 Index VO card cage 137 165 initialization 103 intermittent problem 84 J jumper block pinning 42 170 jumper block pinning 255 blocks 144 147 150 154 157 255 258 261 264 266 jumper blocks 144 147 150 154 157 255 258 261 264 266 jumpers 144 147 150 154 157 255 258 261 264 266 K K
279. view Figure 9 24 Single 210 445 875 MB or 1 8 GB Drive SCSI Cable Routing Top View Cable Clamp gt Red Line gt I O Card Cage Electronics Chassis T Cable Clamp gt gt t gt Red Line Winchester Disk Drive 5 Top View of History Module Drive Chassis 11841 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 198 9 5 6 Single Dual 210 445 875 MB or 1 8 GB Drive Cabling Continued Single drive cable routing side view Figure 9 25 Single 210 445 875 MB or 1 8 GB Drive SCSI Bus Cable Routing Side View Winchester Drive Module SCSI Bus Ribbon Cable Slide Tray Assembly Electronics Module SPC I O Connector SIDE VIEW 16768 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 199 9 5 6 Single Dual 210 445 875 MB or 1 8 GB Drive Cabling Continued Dual drive cabling Figure 9 26 illustrates a side view of the SCSI bus cable routing for a nonredundant dual drive configuration Note the cabling is similar to single drive cabling but the cable continues on to the upper Winchester Drive Module module 2 that contains the second drive The cable is folded and clamped beside the drives on the tray assemblies in the same manner as illustrated in Figure 9 24 The upper Winchester Drive Module contains Drive 5 while the lower Winchester Drive Module contains Drive 3 The drive in the upper module has terminatio
280. when drive initialization and reload are not required ATTENTION When drive initialization and reloading are not required use the procedure in Table 5 14 If the HMI personality software is available in the History Module you can do a personality change directly using the LOAD DUMP target on the History Module Status display If this is the case skip Step 1 It is not necessary to shut down the node to do a personality change Table 5 14 Data Error Recovery Procedure Init Reload Not Required Step Action 1 Perform a node shutdown of the History Module See above text 2 Load the History Module Initialization HMI personality software 3 Initialize the bad sector using the SMCC function This writes zeros into the bad sector 4 Using utility commands reload the known bad file from a known good source This could be from a previously saved copy or some original source of the file If the file in error was a checkpoint file a complete set of files from a previous good checkpoint must be reloaded Checkpoint files must be in synchronization with each other 5 Using utility commands verify that the file in question can be read successfully by copying it from the HM to some scratch media If this is successful the quick repair is complete Continue with Step 9 6 If steps 4 5 were not successful a bad spot exists on the drive media Use the SMCC feature to reassign the known bad sector to the B
281. wo drives to system software even though there is only one physical drive on the tray i e addresses 5 and 3 or 4 and 2 In the nonredundant Type II drive configuration the drive is mounted on the right hand primary Winchester Drive Tray and labeled Drive 5 as illustrated in the Figure 4 6 Drive 5 is pinned configured for SCSI bus address 5 Pinning of the drives is discussed in subsection 11 4 2 Figure 4 6 Nonredundant Dual Drive Configuration a ae SCSI Bus Termination Modules ee sa ee el Drive 5 Drive 5 Mas AAA a pies aoe eo Nonredundant Dual Drives eas 12820 Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 70 4 5 1 Type ll Disk Drives Configuration continued SCSI bus termination The SCSI cable for each tray is terminated by a terminator mounted on modules the end of the SCSI cable See subsection 11 4 2 for detailed installation information Continued on next page 12 02 History Module Service 71 4 5 1 Type ll Disk Drives Configuration Continued SPC to drive tray interconnections Figure 4 7 illustrates the components and interconnections between the SPC circuit board and the right hand primary Winchester Drive Tray The left hand Winchester Drive Tray is not present Figure 4 7 Nonredundant Dual Drive Interconnections Slot 2 Front Smart Peripheral Co
282. y Status Detail display access procedure The Status Detail display for a History Module shows the status for each drive and each function such as Continuous History History Journals and other displays It also contains a target that provides access to the drive s Volume Status display Object Detail display See Figure 5 3 Figure 5 3 Status Detail Display DATE TIME 01 01 83 01 01 83 01 01 83 O1 01 83 01 01 83 O1 01 83 01 01 83 aa oa aa aa aa aa aa 708 00 788 00 788 00 roo NODE COMMENT 1 O1 83 00 08 STATUS DETAIL DISPLAY FOR NODE 5 DISK_ORIVE 5 DISK ORIVE 3 CONT_HISTORY HISTRY_JRNLS ON_PROC_ANLS AUTO_CHECKPT HM_STARTUP ROLL EDIT NODE RIGHT COMMENT NOTIFICATION gt OK gt 0K gt 0K gt 0K gt 0K gt 0K gt 0K I5 DK I5S NOT PRESENT POWERED OFF FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION 11 Jun 91 10 12 16 IS ONLINE IS ONLINE IS ONLINE IS ONLINE IS ONLINE 1 HISTORY DETAIL 7877 Use the procedure in Table 5 21 to access the Status Detail Display Table 5 21 Accessing the Status Detail Display Procedure Step Action 1 Choose the System Status display on the console with the SYSTEM STATUS key 2 Select the HISTORY MODULES target on the System Status display This produces the History Modules display 3 Select the desired History Module on the History Modules display 4 Select the STATUS DETAIL targ
283. y fan assembly cables or the Winchester Disk Assembly One or both Winchester Drive Trays can be removed while power is applied to the History Module because each has a power ON OFF switch Always follow proper ESD Electrostatic Discharge procedures when handling circuit boards or other electronic components 12 02 History Module Service 152 8 2 1 General Disassembly CAUTION Preliminary Figure 8 1 CAUTION Allow at least a 30 second drive spin down time before attempting to remove a Winchester Drive tray If a drive is jarred while its disks are spinning there is head crash potential Disassemble the module only to the extent necessary to repair or replace a defective assembly or part The item numbers referenced in this section are keyed to ballooned numbers in Figure 8 1 These item numbers are also used in Section 10 WDA Type History Module Assembly and Section 12 Spare Parts Figure 3 1 is another view of the History Module assembly Remove the front panel 1 by turning the two quarter turn fasteners at the right side of the panel and swinging the panel outward until free from the chassis slots Place the power switch on the power supply 2 in the OFF position and verify that all indicators on the power supply are extinguished WDA History Module Exploded View 6761 exon CAUTION Many of the assemblies used in this module are likely to contain electrostatically se

History Module Service - Honeywell Process Solutions

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents